Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 468

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Title page

Alcatel-Lucent 9952
Wireless Provisioning System | Release BCR 4
User Guide for Small Cells
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA
Issue 3 | March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Use pursuant to applicable agreements


Legal notice
Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2014 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Contents
About this document
Purpose

......................................................................................................................................................................................... xxv
xxv

Reason for reissue

..................................................................................................................................................................... xxv
xxv

New in this release .................................................................................................................................................................... xxv


xxv
Intended audience

.................................................................................................................................................................... xxvi
xxvi

Supported systems ................................................................................................................................................................... xxvi


xxvi
Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................... xxvi
xxvi
Prerequisites

.............................................................................................................................................................................. xxvi
xxvi

How this document is organized


Conventions used

........................................................................................................................................ xxvi

................................................................................................................................................................... xxvii
xxvii

Related information .............................................................................................................................................................. xxviii


xxviii
Document support ................................................................................................................................................................. xxviii
xxviii
Technical support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxix
xxix
How to order .............................................................................................................................................................................. xxix
xxix
How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxix
xxix
1

Safety Information
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1-2

General principles
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-1
Introduction to WPS
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-3
About WPS .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
iii
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Licenses
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2-5
License requirements ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2-6
Software architecture description
Software architecture overview ........................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-7
Kernel package ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-10
2-10
Plug-ins package ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-14
WPS functions
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2-16

WPS GUI main window

...................................................................................................................................................... 2-17
2-17

Workspace ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-19


2-19
Dynamic behavior .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-23
2-23
Instance browsers

................................................................................................................................................................... 2-24
2-24

Generic instantiation

............................................................................................................................................................. 2-25
2-25

Object editor ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-26


2-26
Tabular editor ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2-28
Comparison ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-29
2-29
Open and save a workspace ................................................................................................................................................ 2-30
2-30
Workorders ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-31
2-31
Templates ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-33
2-33
Checks

........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-37
2-37

Audit ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-39


2-39
Datasets ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-41
2-41
Navigators ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-42
2-42
WPS external interfaces ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-43
2-43
Multiuser collaboration ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-45
2-45
WPS data sharing

................................................................................................................................................................... 2-47
2-47

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
iv
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Bulk provisioning in tabular editor .................................................................................................................................. 2-56


2-56
WPS case-insensitive import interface ........................................................................................................................... 2-57
2-57
File browser .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-58
2-58
Parameter search ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-59
2-59
3

Graphical User Interface


Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-1
WPS main window
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3-3
WPS main window ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-4
Menu bar
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
3-9
File

............................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3-10

Edit ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13


3-13
Go to ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-14
3-14
Workorders ................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-15
3-15
Templates ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-19
3-19
Datasets ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-29
3-29
Checks

........................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-30
3-30

Audits .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-35


3-35
Sharing
Help

....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-38
3-38

............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-41
3-41

Tool bar
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-44
3-44

Toolbar contents ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-45


3-45
Instance browser
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-47
3-47

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
v
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network tab

.............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-48
3-48

Workorders tab
Templates tab

........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-50
3-50

........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-55
3-55

Datasets tab ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-58


3-58
Checks tab ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-60
3-60
Audit tab

.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-62
3-62

Object editor: Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-64


3-64
Object editor: Edition ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-68
3-68
Workorder Panel
Template panel

..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-76
3-76

........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-83
3-83

Dataset conversion panel ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-86


3-86
Checks panel

............................................................................................................................................................................ 3-88
3-88

Audit panel ................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-94


3-94
Import and export wizard
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-103
3-103
Exporting key masks

.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-104
3-104

Export of snapshots ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-110


3-110
Exporting template masks ................................................................................................................................................. 3-117
3-117
Exporting templates

............................................................................................................................................................ 3-120
3-120

Export of workorders .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-124


3-124
Importing key masks

.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-129
3-129

Importing reference workorders ..................................................................................................................................... 3-133


3-133
Import of snapshots ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-136
3-136
Importing template masks ................................................................................................................................................. 3-147
3-147
Importing templates

............................................................................................................................................................ 3-149
3-149

Importing workorders ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-153


3-153

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
vi
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Report window and progress bar


Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-158
3-158
Tabular editor capabilities
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-160
3-160
Help
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-167
3-167
4

General WPS operating procedures


Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-1
Workspace management
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-5
4-5
Creating a new workspace ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4-6
Opening a workspace

.............................................................................................................................................................. 4-7
4-7

Saving a workspace .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-8


4-8
Configuring WPS settings for network operations ....................................................................................................... 4-9
4-9
Importing network snapshots ............................................................................................................................................. 4-11
4-11
Importing tabular from Excel file ..................................................................................................................................... 4-20
4-20
Creating a sub-network

........................................................................................................................................................ 4-21
4-21

Setting a sub-network as active ......................................................................................................................................... 4-22


4-22
Renaming a sub-network ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-23
4-23
Removing a sub-network ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-24
4-24
Exporting a snapshot ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-25
4-25
Data sharing management
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-32
4-32

Setting or changing connection parameters .................................................................................................................. 4-33


4-33
Creating shared workspace ................................................................................................................................................. 4-36
4-36
Opening shared workspace ................................................................................................................................................. 4-37
4-37
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
vii
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing shared workspace .............................................................................................................................................. 4-38


4-38
Synchronizing workspace

................................................................................................................................................... 4-39
4-39

Refreshing resource synchronization status .................................................................................................................. 4-40


4-40
Publishing resource ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-41
4-41
Retrieving resource ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-42
4-42
Removing shared resource .................................................................................................................................................. 4-43
4-43
Making a local copy

.............................................................................................................................................................. 4-44
4-44

Delivering workorder for activation ................................................................................................................................ 4-45


4-45
Templates management
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-46
4-46

Setting the default source

.................................................................................................................................................... 4-47
4-47

Importing templates ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-48


4-48
Creating a template ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-50
4-50
Creating template from a network/dataset object ....................................................................................................... 4-51
4-51
Adding a child to a template instance ............................................................................................................................. 4-52
4-52
Removing a template instance ........................................................................................................................................... 4-53
4-53
Duplicating a template .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-54
4-54
Migrating a template

............................................................................................................................................................. 4-55
4-55

Distilling a template

.............................................................................................................................................................. 4-56
4-56

Comparing templates

............................................................................................................................................................ 4-57
4-57

Updating template .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-58


4-58
Setting template as default .................................................................................................................................................. 4-59
4-59
Unsetting a template as default

......................................................................................................................................... 4-60
4-60

Renaming a template ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-61


4-61
Deleting a template ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-62
4-62
Exporting templates ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-63
4-63

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
viii
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

External interfaces
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-64
4-64

Importing a configuration file ............................................................................................................................................ 4-65


4-65
Exporting a configuration file ............................................................................................................................................ 4-67
4-67
Exporting table ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-69
4-69
Workorder management
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-70
4-70

Importing workorders

........................................................................................................................................................... 4-71
4-71

Importing reference workorders


Creating a workorder

....................................................................................................................................... 4-72
4-72

............................................................................................................................................................ 4-75
4-75

Modifying a workorder

........................................................................................................................................................ 4-76
4-76

Merging workorders .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-78


4-78
Finalizing workorders ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-79
4-79
Exporting a single workorder ............................................................................................................................................. 4-81
4-81
Exporting multiple workorders

......................................................................................................................................... 4-82
4-82

Managing reference workorders


Deleting a workorder

...................................................................................................................................... 4-84
4-84

............................................................................................................................................................ 4-88
4-88

Datasets management
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-89
4-89

Creating a new dataset from MOIs .................................................................................................................................. 4-90


4-90
Creating a new dataset from a current one .................................................................................................................... 4-91
4-91
Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information ............................................................................................ 4-92
4-92
Adding MOIs from the network tree ............................................................................................................................... 4-94
4-94
Adding MOI(s) by conversion ........................................................................................................................................... 4-95
4-95
Removing objects from the network using a Dataset ................................................................................................ 4-96
4-96
Removing MOIs from a Dataset ....................................................................................................................................... 4-97
4-97
Exporting a dataset ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-98
4-98
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
ix
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a Dataset

.................................................................................................................................................................. 4-99
4-99

Checks management
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-100
4-100
Creating a check profile ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-101
4-101
Updating a check profile

................................................................................................................................................... 4-102
4-102

Copying a check profile ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-103


4-103
Copying check profiles between WPS applications ................................................................................................ 4-104
4-104
Running checks on MOIs

................................................................................................................................................. 4-105
4-105

Running checks on dataset objects ................................................................................................................................ 4-106


4-106
Re-running a check session .............................................................................................................................................. 4-107
4-107
Running checks on several object instances
Deleting a check session

.............................................................................................................. 4-108
4-108

................................................................................................................................................... 4-109
4-109

Audit management
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-110
4-110
Creating an audit profile .................................................................................................................................................... 4-111
4-111
Updating an audit profile ................................................................................................................................................... 4-112
4-112
Duplicating an audit profile .............................................................................................................................................. 4-113
4-113
Reusing audit profiles between different WPS applications ................................................................................ 4-114
4-114
Auditing network objects .................................................................................................................................................. 4-115
4-115
Auditing dataset objects ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-116
4-116
Re-running an audit session

............................................................................................................................................. 4-117
4-117

Deleting an audit session ................................................................................................................................................... 4-118


4-118
Exporting key masks ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-119
4-119
Importing key masks

.......................................................................................................................................................... 4-125
4-125

Network objects (network MOI) management


Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-129
4-129

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
x
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a network object ................................................................................................................................................. 4-130


4-130
Duplicating a network object ........................................................................................................................................... 4-131
4-131
Modifying a network object ............................................................................................................................................. 4-132
4-132
Modifying a network object based on a template

.................................................................................................... 4-133
4-133

Comparing a network object with a template ............................................................................................................ 4-134


4-134
Comparing two object instances ..................................................................................................................................... 4-135
4-135
Comparing attributes for an object ................................................................................................................................ 4-136
4-136
Exporting a network object

.............................................................................................................................................. 4-137
4-137

Deleting a network object ................................................................................................................................................. 4-138


4-138
Change attribute value
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-139
4-139
Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab .................................................................................................. 4-140
4-140
Changing an attribute value from the Network tab

................................................................................................. 4-141
4-141

Changing attribute value using a template .................................................................................................................. 4-142


4-142
Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same object class

....................................................... 4-143
4-143

Help on Object Types


Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-144
4-144
Browsing a Network Object ............................................................................................................................................. 4-145
4-145
Searching for an Object ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-146
4-146
5

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-1
BSRProfile Migration
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5-3
Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release ................................................................................................................................ 5-4
5-4
Migrating a BSRProfile inter-release

................................................................................................................................ 5-6
5-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
xi
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring FGW with WPS


Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5-7
WPS support of ATCA based FGW
Configuring FGW data in WPS

................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5-8

........................................................................................................................................ 5-10
5-10

Generating FGW CLI file in WPS

................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5-11

Configuring IPC with WPS


Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-12
5-12

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

............................................................................................................................ 5-13
5-13

Customizing IPC data with WPS ...................................................................................................................................... 5-19


5-19
Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS ..................................................................................................................... 5-21
5-21
Copying configuration data from another IPC

............................................................................................................ 5-24
5-24

Configuring locationProfile with WPS


Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-28
5-28

Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network .............................................................................. 5-29


5-29
Configuring LocationProfile for a location (region)

................................................................................................. 5-31
5-31

Configuring LocationProfile for a Small Cell group ................................................................................................. 5-32


5-32
Reparenting Small Cells
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5-33

Reparenting a Small Cell ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-34


5-34
Reparenting Small Cells in bulk

....................................................................................................................................... 5-37
5-37

Configuring Call Trace on NEs


Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-40
5-40

Activating Call Trace sessions on FGW ........................................................................................................................ 5-41


5-41
Activating Call Trace sessions on IPC

........................................................................................................................... 5-43
5-43

Activating Call Trace sessions on a small cell ............................................................................................................. 5-45


5-45

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
xii
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Terminology
Glossary of terms ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6-1

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
xiii
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
xiv
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

List of tables
2-1

Contents of the Log table

.................................................................................................................................... 2-50

2-2

Resource synchronization status ........................................................................................................................ 2-51

2-3

Synchronization operations

2-4

Search buttons

3-1

Edit menu commands

3-2

Go to menu commands

3-3

Datasets menu

3-4

Toolbar

3-5

Check session panel contents .............................................................................................................................. 3-91

................................................................................................................................. 2-53

.......................................................................................................................................................... 2-59
2-59
............................................................................................................................................ 3-13
3-13
......................................................................................................................................... 3-14

.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-29
3-29

........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-45
3-45

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
xv
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
xvi
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

List of figures
2-1

High level architecture description

..................................................................................................................... 2-8

2-2

WPS software packages

2-3

WPS main window

2-4

Transition between base state and current state

2-5

Network state recomputation

2-6

Instance browser : tabs

.......................................................................................................................................... 2-24

2-7

Multiuser collaboration

......................................................................................................................................... 2-46
2-46

2-8

WPS data sharing principle

2-9

Synchronized workspace ...................................................................................................................................... 2-50

2-10

Desynchronized workspace

2-11

Log table ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-51


2-51

2-12

Data sharing integration with WMS ................................................................................................................. 2-54

2-13

Search interface

2-14

Search option

2-15

Search suggestion mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 2-60

3-1

WPS main window

3-2

WPS for Access Network title bar ....................................................................................................................... 3-5

3-3

Workspace name

........................................................................................................................................................ 3-5
3-5

3-4

Instance browser

........................................................................................................................................................ 3-6
3-6

3-5

Dynamic behavior on MO selection

3-6

Change settings

3-7

Repository menu options ...................................................................................................................................... 3-17

3-8

Set current source .................................................................................................................................................... 3-19


3-19

.......................................................................................................................................... 2-9

................................................................................................................................................. 2-17
2-17
........................................................................................... 2-20

.............................................................................................................................. 2-22

................................................................................................................................. 2-48

................................................................................................................................. 2-50

....................................................................................................................................................... 2-59
2-59

............................................................................................................................................................ 2-60
2-60

................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-4

................................................................................................................... 3-8

........................................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3-12

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
xvii
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-9

Template from network tree

................................................................................................................................ 3-20

3-10

Template from templates tree

3-11

Propagate template

3-12

Compare with template

3-13

Set template as default ........................................................................................................................................... 3-24


3-24

3-14

Export template ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-25


3-25

3-15

Migrate template ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-26


3-26

3-16

Migrate template result

3-17

Distill template

3-18

Distill template result ............................................................................................................................................. 3-28


3-28

3-19

Checks panel

............................................................................................................................................................. 3-31
3-31

3-20

Check profile

............................................................................................................................................................ 3-33
3-33

3-21

Audit panel

3-22

Connect to a live server

3-23

Licenses: WPS for Small Cells

3-24

Help: WPS for Small Cells

3-25

About

3-26

WPS main Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................. 3-45


3-45

3-27

Network tab

3-28

Workorders tab

3-29

Workorders - set current

3-30

Workorders - inhibit changes

3-31

Workorders - merge

3-32

Workorders - merge dialog box

3-33

Workorders - merge result .................................................................................................................................... 3-54

3-34

Templates tab

3-35

Datasets tab

............................................................................................................................. 3-20

................................................................................................................................................. 3-22
3-22
......................................................................................................................................... 3-23
3-23

......................................................................................................................................... 3-27
3-27

......................................................................................................................................................... 3-28
3-28

................................................................................................................................................................ 3-36
3-36
........................................................................................................................................ 3-39
.......................................................................................................................... 3-41

.................................................................................................................................. 3-42

........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-43
3-43

............................................................................................................................................................... 3-48
3-48
......................................................................................................................................................... 3-50
3-50
....................................................................................................................................... 3-51
.............................................................................................................................. 3-52

................................................................................................................................................ 3-53
......................................................................................................................... 3-54

............................................................................................................................................................ 3-56
3-56

............................................................................................................................................................... 3-58
3-58

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
xviii
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-36

Checks tab .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-60


3-60

3-37

Audit tab

3-38

Object editor: Overview panel

3-39

Operations .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-64


3-64

3-40

Navigation .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-65


3-65

3-41

Children

3-42

Change history

3-43

Object editor: Edition panel

3-44

Object creation

3-45

Object attributes: by instance .............................................................................................................................. 3-69

3-46

Multi-value modification from tabular editor

3-47

Sort mechanism on column header ................................................................................................................... 3-71

3-48

Object attributes: by type

3-49

Attribute details

3-50

Attribute description

3-51

Attribute input panel data types

3-52

Workorder panel

3-53

Workorder description panel

3-54

Workorder editor panel

3-55

Network change tree

3-56

Inhibit/Disinhibit changes in a workorder

3-57

Unsynchronized workspace ................................................................................................................................. 3-81

3-58

Template information panel ................................................................................................................................. 3-83

3-59

Template edition panel

.......................................................................................................................................... 3-84
3-84

3-60

Attribute value change

.......................................................................................................................................... 3-85
3-85

3-61

Dataset conversion panel ...................................................................................................................................... 3-86

3-62

Check profile panel

..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-62
3-62
........................................................................................................................... 3-64

...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-66
3-66
......................................................................................................................................................... 3-67
3-67
................................................................................................................................ 3-68

......................................................................................................................................................... 3-69
3-69

............................................................................................... 3-70

..................................................................................................................................... 3-72

....................................................................................................................................................... 3-74
3-74
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-75
3-75
......................................................................................................................... 3-75

...................................................................................................................................................... 3-76
3-76
............................................................................................................................... 3-77

......................................................................................................................................... 3-78

.............................................................................................................................................. 3-79
3-79
..................................................................................................... 3-79

................................................................................................................................................ 3-88
3-88

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
xix
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-63

Check session panel

............................................................................................................................................... 3-90
3-90

3-64

Audit profile panel

3-65

Contextual menu from audit profile panel

3-66

Audit session panel ................................................................................................................................................. 3-96


3-96

3-67

Audit session identification

3-68

Report tab ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-98


3-98

3-69

Audited types tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-99


3-99

3-70

Audit key mask panel

............................................................................................................................................ 3-99

3-71

Template mask panel

........................................................................................................................................... 3-101
3-101

3-72

Contextual menu from Audit Template Masks panel

3-73

Import and export wizard: export key masks

3-74

Export key masks (local file system)

3-75

Select a file .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-107


3-107

3-76

Export key masks : Start

3-77

Export key masks: Completed

3-78

Import and Export Wizard: export snapshot

3-79

Export snapshot (local file system)

3-80

Edit Filter

3-81

Select Filter

3-82

Export snapshot: Start

3-83

Export snapshot: Completed ............................................................................................................................. 3-116

3-84

Export template masks (local file system) ................................................................................................... 3-118

3-85

Select source for export

3-86

Export templates (local file system)

3-87

Export template: Completed

3-88

Import and Export Wizard: export workorder ............................................................................................ 3-125

3-89

Export workorders (local file system) ........................................................................................................... 3-126

.................................................................................................................................................. 3-94
3-94
..................................................................................................... 3-95

................................................................................................................................. 3-97

.............................................................................. 3-102

............................................................................................. 3-105

............................................................................................................ 3-106

.................................................................................................................................... 3-108
......................................................................................................................... 3-109
............................................................................................... 3-111

................................................................................................................ 3-112

................................................................................................................................................................. 3-113
3-113
............................................................................................................................................................. 3-114
3-114
......................................................................................................................................... 3-115

...................................................................................................................................... 3-121
.............................................................................................................. 3-122

............................................................................................................................. 3-123

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
xx
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-90

Select a file .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-126


3-126

3-91

Export workorder: Start ...................................................................................................................................... 3-127

3-92

Export workorder: Completed

3-93

Import and Export wizard: Import key masks ............................................................................................ 3-130

3-94

Import key masks: (Local file system)

3-95

Import reference workorder - Specify folder name .................................................................................. 3-134

3-96

Reference Workorder

3-97

Import and export wizard: import snapshot

3-98

Source

3-99

Import snapshot: mode selection

......................................................................................................................... 3-128

......................................................................................................... 3-131

......................................................................................................................................... 3-135
................................................................................................ 3-137

....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-137
3-137
.................................................................................................................... 3-138

3-100 Import snapshot: file selection (local file system)

.................................................................................... 3-139

3-101 Import snapshot: file selection (live server repository)


3-102 Select a CM XML snapshot

.............................................................................................................................. 3-141

3-103 Import snapshot (snapshot selected)


3-104 Select subset of objects to import
3-105 Top-Level objects analysis
3-106 Import snapshot: Start

.......................................................................... 3-140

.............................................................................................................. 3-142

................................................................................................................... 3-143

................................................................................................................................ 3-144

......................................................................................................................................... 3-145

3-107 Import snapshot: Completed ............................................................................................................................. 3-146


3-108 Import template masks: Completed
3-109 Import templates: file selection

............................................................................................................... 3-148

....................................................................................................................... 3-150

3-110 Template file analysis .......................................................................................................................................... 3-151


3-151
3-111

Import template: Completed

............................................................................................................................. 3-152

3-112 Import workorders (Local file system)

......................................................................................................... 3-154

3-113 Import workorders (Live server repository)

............................................................................................... 3-155

3-114 Import workorders: workorder selection ...................................................................................................... 3-157


3-115 Report window example
3-116 Progress bar example

.................................................................................................................................... 3-158

.......................................................................................................................................... 3-159

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
xxi
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-117 Filtering on cell

..................................................................................................................................................... 3-161
3-161

3-118 Filter on cell value example .............................................................................................................................. 3-162


3-119 Example HTML output

...................................................................................................................................... 3-164

3-120 Filtering from header column ........................................................................................................................... 3-164


3-121 Contextual menu on combo box

..................................................................................................................... 3-166

3-122 Floating help window .......................................................................................................................................... 3-168


3-123 Help toolbar

............................................................................................................................................................ 3-168
3-168

3-124 Help home page ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-169


3-169
3-125 Help find panel

...................................................................................................................................................... 3-170
3-170

3-126 Search help .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-171


3-171
3-127 Model for BCR help

............................................................................................................................................ 3-172

3-128 Help screen for an object

................................................................................................................................... 3-173

4-1

Import snapshot: mode selection

....................................................................................................................... 4-12

4-2

Import snapshot: file selection (local file system)

4-3

Import snapshot: define repository

4-4

Import snapshot: file selection (live server repository) ............................................................................. 4-15

4-5

Select objects to import ......................................................................................................................................... 4-16


4-16

4-6

Select a subset of top-level objects

4-7

Select a specific subset of top-level objects

4-8

Import snapshot: completed

4-9

Export snapshot (local file system)

4-10

Export snapshot: Edit filter .................................................................................................................................. 4-27

4-11

Select a subset of top-level objects

4-12

Select a specific subset of top-level objects

4-13

Select a parameterized filter

................................................................................................................................ 4-30
4-30

4-14

Export snapshot: Completed

............................................................................................................................... 4-31

4-15

WPS settings window ............................................................................................................................................ 4-34

...................................................................................... 4-13

................................................................................................................... 4-14

................................................................................................................... 4-17
.................................................................................................. 4-18

................................................................................................................................ 4-19
.................................................................................................................. 4-26

................................................................................................................... 4-28
.................................................................................................. 4-29

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
xxii
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-16

Import reference workorder

................................................................................................................................ 4-72

4-17

Reference Workorder

4-18

Import and export wizard: export key masks

4-19

Export key masks (local file system)

4-20

Select a file .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-122


4-122

4-21

Export key masks : Start

4-22

Export key masks: Completed

4-23

Import and Export wizard: Import key masks ............................................................................................ 4-126

4-24

Import key masks: (Local file system)

5-1

Import FGW configuration

5-2

ATCA based FGW MOIs

5-3

Compare data of two IPC objects ...................................................................................................................... 5-25

5-4

Small Cell reparenting ........................................................................................................................................... 5-35


5-35

5-5

Bulk reparenting

............................................................................................................................................ 4-74
............................................................................................. 4-120

............................................................................................................ 4-121

.................................................................................................................................... 4-123
......................................................................................................................... 4-124

......................................................................................................... 4-127

.................................................................................................................................... 5-7

........................................................................................................................................ 5-9

...................................................................................................................................................... 5-38
5-38

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
xxiii
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
xxiv
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

About this document


About this document

Purpose

This document provides information on how to configure small cells networks using 9952
wireless provisioning system (WPS).
The Alcatel-Lucent WPS is optional in the Small Cell Management System (SCMS)
product suite.
Reason for reissue

The reissue reasons are:


Issue number

Issue date

Reason for reissue

March 2014

Standard issue

September 2013

Standard issue

March 2013

Standard issue

New in this release

New features:

118683, Enhanced Geographical Algorithm, see Reparenting Small Cells (p. 5-33).

126798, Release BCR 4.0 Security Enhancement, see Reparenting a Small Cell
(p. 5-34).
164324, 9952 WPS support of Small Cell. The entire document is updated to reflect
the new kernel information.

Other changes:

Added a note to address the CR # 01194711 in BSRProfile Migration


(p. 5-3) section.
Updated document references through out the document.
Updates to WPS licensing information. For more information, see Licenses (p. 2-5).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
xxv
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

About this document


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Updates to Graphical User Interface options. For more information, see Chapter 3,
Graphical User Interface.
Updates to general WPS operating procedures. For more information, see Chapter 4,
General WPS operating procedures.

Intended audience

The intended audience of this document is the configuration management personnel.


Supported systems

This document applies to Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell Solution BCR4 system release.
Safety information

For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
Prerequisites

A good knowledge of UTRAN configuration principles.


Readers should be familiar with the following documents:
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System Small Cells - User Guide,
9YZ-05614-0623-TCZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System Small Cells - Parameters Reference
Guide. This document is divided into four parts:

Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell - BSR Parameters Reference Guide, 9YZ-05614-0600RKZZA

Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell - BSG Parameters Reference Guide, 9YZ-05614-0601RKZZA


Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell - IPC Parameters Reference Guide, 9YZ-05614-0602RKZZA
Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell - OAM Parameters Reference Guide, 9YZ-05614-0603RKZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless Provisioning System - Installation and Administration


Guide, 9YZ-05608-0001-RJZZA
How this document is organized

No specific recommendation applies regarding the way readers should read this
document.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
xxvi
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

About this document


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Conventions used
Vocabulary conventions

The following terms are modified to align with the corporate re-branding:
Old naming convention

New naming convention

Femto Management System (FMS)

Small Cell Management System (SCMS)

Femto Management Solution (FMS)


Femto

Small Cell

BSR Femto

Small Cell

BSR Cluster

Small Cell Cluster

Wireless Management System for Femto


(WMS for Femto)

Wireless Management System Small Cells (WMS


Small Cells)

Wireless Provisioning System for Femto


(WPS for Femto)

Wireless Provisioning System (WPS)

Typographical conventions

The following typographical conventions are used in this document:


Appearance

Description

italicized text

File and directory names

Emphasized information

graphical user interface text

Text that is displayed in a graphical user interface or in


a hardware label

variable

A value that the user supplies

key name

The name of a key on the keyboard

command-syntax

Command names that the user types

input text

Text that the user types or selects as input to a system

output text

Text that a system displays or prints

IP reference, reference number

Related document that is referenced in the document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
xxvii
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

About this document


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Related information
Refer to this document

At this location

For more information on

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless


Provisioning System Installation and
Administration Guide,
9YZ-05608-0001-RJZZA

http://support.alcatellucent.com

WPS installation and


configuration procedures.

Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless


Management System Small
Cells - Introduction,
9YZ-05614-0609-ACZZA

http://support.alcatellucent.com

SCMS documentation collection.

Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless


Management System Small
Cells - User Guide,
9YZ-05614-0623-TCZZA

http://support.alcatellucent.com

WMS features, GUI functions,


and menu commands.

Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell Feature Activation


Procedures,
9YZ-05614-0014-PGZZA

http://support.alcatellucent.com

Feature activation procedures for


the Small Cell network.

Document support

For support in using this or any other Alcatel-Lucent document, contact Alcatel-Lucent at
the following telephone numbers. These numbers apply for document support only. Please
see the section Technical support for details about product hardware, software, and
technical support.
When using this type of
phone

From within the United


States, dial

From outside the United


States, dial

Cellular or VoIP

1-888-582-3688

+1-630-224-2485

Landline phones lacking the


plus (+) character

1-888-582-3688

origination country exit


code-1-630-224-2485
(replace the plus sign with
your country's exit code)
See a listing of exit codes.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
xxviii
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

About this document


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Technical support

For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact
information.
How to order

To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use Online
Customer Support (OLCS) (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com).
How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatellucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
xxix
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

About this document


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
xxx
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Safety Information
1

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides information on the structure of safety statements which may arise
in the course of your work.
Contents
Structure of safety statements

1-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
1-1
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Safety Information

Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Structure of safety statements


Overview

This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.
General structure

Safety statements include the following structural elements:

E
L
MP

CAUTION

Lifting hazard

SA

Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury


due to the size and weight of the equipment.

Always use three people or a lifting device to transport


and position this equipment.
[ABC123]

F
G
H

Item

Structure element

Purpose

Safety alert symbol

Indicates the potential for personal injury


(optional)

Safety symbol

Indicates hazard type (optional)

Signal word

Indicates the severity of the hazard

Hazard type

Describes the source of the risk of damage or


injury

Safety message

Consequences if protective measures fail

Avoidance message

Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard

Identifier

The reference ID of the safety statement


(optional)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
1-2
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Safety Information

Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Signal words

The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:


Signal word

Meaning

DANGER

Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will


result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in


death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in


minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
1-3
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Safety Information

Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
1-4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
2

Overview
Purpose

This chapter describes the general principles of the WPS.


Contents
Introduction to WPS

2-3

About WPS

2-4

Licenses

2-5

License requirements

2-6

Software architecture description

2-7

Software architecture overview

2-7

Kernel package

2-10

Plug-ins package

2-14

WPS functions

2-16

WPS GUI main window

2-17

Workspace

2-19

Dynamic behavior

2-23

Instance browsers

2-24

Generic instantiation

2-25

Object editor

2-26

Tabular editor

2-28

Comparison

2-29

Open and save a workspace

2-30

Workorders

2-31

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-1
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Templates

2-33

Checks

2-37

Audit

2-39

Datasets

2-41

Navigators

2-42

WPS external interfaces

2-43

Multiuser collaboration

2-45

WPS data sharing

2-47

Bulk provisioning in tabular editor

2-56

WPS case-insensitive import interface

2-57

File browser

2-58

Parameter search

2-59

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-2
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Introduction to WPS

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to WPS
Overview
Purpose

This section introduces the WPS.


Contents
About WPS

2-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-3
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Introduction to WPS

About WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

About WPS
Overview

WPS is a high-performance kernel, which provides support to design and configure


Alcatel-Lucent networks, based on specific networks recommendations. WPS offers a
centralized view, and configuration of all Network Elements (NE) and related parameters.
WPS kernel-based applications can be used for configuration at every stage of network
management:

Data engineering of a new network


Data engineering for network expansion, densification
Data engineering for network optimization
Data engineering for upgrade provisioning

WPS manages configuration data coming from various sources. The source file format
used in WPS is CM XML.
WPS operations support very large networks. A single instance of WPS supports multiple
WMS main servers within a Regional Operational Center (ROC).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Licenses

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Licenses
Overview
Purpose

This section provides an overview of licenses.


Contents
License requirements

2-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-5
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Licenses

License requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

License requirements
Installation scenarios

The following installation scenarios are applicable to the current version of the :

Installation on a PC client
Installation in a multi-user environment (such as Citrix Systems, Inc. Citrix servers).

A license file is required to use the application.


A demo license file is provided with the software for each installation scenario. The demo
licenses can be installed on any PC or Citrix server.
Note: The Version 3.0 software installs the plug-ins for all supported technologies
automatically by default. The installed licenses filter what plug-ins are visible in the
GUI.
The demo license supports all technologies (LTE, W-CDMA, and Small Cells). Thus,
when the demo license is installed, the plug-ins for all supported technologies are
visible in the GUI.
The GUI screen images in this document presume that the user only has the licenses
installed. Thus, the user can only see the features and options in the GUI.
In a multi-user environment such as Citrix, a license is required for each server on which
the application must be installed. If the Citrix environment is composed of a farm of
servers, ensure that you have the required set of licenses for installation and use.
For more information on installation and obtaining and importing the license files, see
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless Provisioning System - Installation and Administration
Guide, 9YZ-05608-0001-RJZZA.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-6
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Software architecture description

Software architecture overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software architecture description


Software architecture overview
High level software architecture

The WPS architecture is illustrated in the following figure:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-7
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Software architecture description

Software architecture overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-1 High level architecture description

The WPS software architecture is based on the following two software packages:

the Kernel package (p. 2-10)

the Plug-ins package (p. 2-14)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-8
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Software architecture description

Software architecture overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-2 WPS software packages

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-9
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Software architecture description

Kernel package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Kernel package
Characteristics of the kernel package

The kernel package has the following characteristics:

Defines a structure for the network configuration data. For more information, see
Structure of the network configuration data (p. 2-10).
Provides an event propagation that allows other services to monitor all changes of the
network configuration data. The workorders are updated based on the event
propagation. For more information, see Event propagation (p. 2-11).
Provides a GUI that is built as a set of independent panels. These panels interact
through event propagation. For more information, see GUI components (p. 2-12).
Provides feature-specific services such as templates and datasets with the same model
or GUI. For more information, see Feature specific services (p. 2-13).

Structure of the network configuration data

The WPS uses a generic representation of the network configuration data.


The following types of data structure are available:

Managed object types


Managed object instances

Managed object types

The following properties represent each managed object type in WPS:

Name and identifier of the type, for example, Lp, LogicalProcessor.


Containment constraints such as the kind of managed objects and how many managed
objects it can contain.
Description of each attribute with the following information:

Name
Description

A primary key indication for the attribute. A primary key is the object identifier in
the containment tree.
The data type and constraints of the attribute, for instance, a decimal in the range
[1..16383], or a list of 20-character maximum ASCII strings, or a structure
containing two IP addresses and a decimal.

The WPS can manage several versions of the same object type. These versions are
managed as different and independent object types.
The workspace contains a set of models that belong to a set of versions. A given managed
object type can belong to only one version.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-10
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Software architecture description

Kernel package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Managed object instances

Based on the object types information, the WPS can create and modify object instances.
These object instances are organized into a containment tree. The following properties
describe each node of the tree:

The managed object type

The key value (a unique identifier in the scope of its parent)


The attribute values
A list of all the managed object instances contained in the node

The keys and attribute values are expressed in the tool using one of the following data
structures:

Atomic - Represents an atomic value such as an ASCII String, a decimal.


List - Represents an ordered or variable-length array of values.

Struct - Represents an ordered or fixed-length array of named values.

Event propagation

The event propagation allows other services to monitor all changes made to the network
configuration data.
Workorder definition

A workorder defines the transition from an initial configuration to a final configuration


that fulfills an evolution request.
A workorder is a structure composed of the following basic changes:

Creation of a MOI
Deletion of a MOI

Modification of a MOI

The network configuration represented in the WPS is the MO tree. The MO tree in WPS
indicate the result of the execution of these changes on an initial reference network
configuration. The MO tree managed within WPS is thus a final view of the configuration
changes.
Configuration change events

An event propagation mechanism is implemented in the kernel, which ensures that any
modification made on the MO tree generates an event. The events are broadcast to the
potential listeners.
The event propagation mechanism is used in the GUI package. The workorder manager
also considers these events to update the current workorder.
The interfaces used to update the MO tree within the WPS are all based on this
mechanism.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-11
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Software architecture description

Kernel package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replaying workorders

The MO tree managed within the WPS is a final view of the network. The MO tree
includes all the modifications represented by the workorders.
If a change must be made in the workorder list, the final view is rebuilt with the
following:

A reference to the initial configuration snapshot is kept within the kernel. Usually, this
is a reference to a snapshot that can be re-imported into WPS.
The workorder management service enables execution of workorder on a network
configuration.

To re-evaluate a set of workorders, the WPS runs the following operations:

Discarding the current network configuration


Loading the initial snapshot

Executing the commands of each workorder in the list

GUI components

The GUI is implemented as a set of independent components that interact by referring to


the same network configuration data. These components exchange data on the selection
and modification events.
Modification events

The modification events are generated each time the MO tree is modified. Specific
modification events are also broadcast when data structures such as templates or datasets
are modified. The GUI elements such as panels or menu actions can subscribe to these
notifications.
Current selection

The GUI package also relies on the concept of current selection. The current selection is
handled through the exchange of selection events.
The selection can apply to any of the following objects:

Workorder
Template
Set of managed objects

The selection is exclusive, that is, the selection of an element replaces the previous
selection.
This event-based selection mechanism allows any GUI element to be either a selection
source, a selection listener, or both. For instance, a menu action can select an element. A
menu action can listen to the selection of specific elements to turn itself enabled or
disabled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-12
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Software architecture description

Kernel package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Feature specific services

WPS provides feature-specific services with the relevant mechanisms or the templates
and the datasets.
The templates, datasets, and checks are implemented on top of the basic services and
follow the same model and GUI mechanism.
Templates

A template is associated to a Managed Object type. The templates contain a list of default
values for all the type attributes and can be used by the MO instantiation mechanism. This
allows to initialize attribute values for new MOs. The templates can also be used during
the MO lifetime to alter a subset of its attributes.
The template manager maintains the mapping between an object type and all the
associated templates.
Specific modification events are generated in the following cases:

A template is created.

A template is deleted.
A template attribute is modified.

The association between a Managed Object and its original template is not retained within
the tool. In other words, the template assignment feature is not supported in WPS.
Datasets

A dataset is a set of references to managed objects. A dataset manager maintains a list of


all existing datasets.
Specific modification events are generated each time:

a dataset is created
a dataset is deleted
a reference is added to a dataset
a reference is removed from a dataset

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-13
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Software architecture description

Plug-ins package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Plug-ins package
WPS is a common platform for the development of network technology-specific services.
WPS for UMTS is based on this platform. These services are implemented using the
following types of components, named plug-ins:

Checks plug-in (p. 2-14)

Navigators plug-in (p. 2-14)

Operations plug-in (p. 2-14)

Checks plug-in

A check performs an audit on a given part of a network configuration. A check can also
generate a report which can help to fix configuration problems.
Semantic check interface

A custom-designed check must comply with the CustomCheck interface. As such, it must
indicate the kind of Managed Object on which it applies.
Navigators plug-in

A navigator performs a crossing of the network configuration tree. With this option, you
can find a target managed object that is logically associated to a source managed object.
Navigators are implemented to provide association-like services when the association is
not described in the network configuration model.
Navigator interface

A couple (source/target) of Managed Object types identify the navigators. As such, a


custom-designed navigator must comply to the CustomNavigator interface.
A navigator provides the following information:

the type of the source MOs

the type of the target MOs towards which the navigation is applied

Operations plug-in

An operation performs a set of modifications on the network configuration data. The user
can fine-tune the set of parameters.
Operation interface

A typical operation involves the following two components:

a model part, which is closely related to the network configuration data


a panel or the GUI part

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-14
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
Software architecture description

Plug-ins package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The two parts interact by exchanging a list of parameters. This list contains the parameter
values specified by the user. The typical interaction between an operation and its
associated panel consists of the following phases:
1. Create the list of parameters
The operation is invoked on a given MO. According to the information found on the
MO and its neighborhood, the operation builds a list of parameters. For each
parameter, the following attributes are specified:
the name
the type
For instance, an enumeration of the following values: true, false, or unknown.
the default value
For instance, False. This value is typically computed from the information found
in the MO and represents an abstraction of the current network configuration.
2. Check the list of parameters
When the user changes the parameter values, the operation may check the consistency
of these parameters. Eventually, the inconsistent parameters are tagged as erroneous.
3. Run operation
When the operation has approved the parameter list, the panel can invoke the
execution of the operation. The network configuration is updated during this phase
only.
A standard operation panel is provided with the tool. However, it is possible to implement
a specific panel for a given operation. This may be implemented if specific graphical
representations are needed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-15
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WPS functions
Overview
Purpose
Contents
WPS GUI main window

2-17

Workspace

2-19

Dynamic behavior

2-23

Instance browsers

2-24

Generic instantiation

2-25

Object editor

2-26

Tabular editor

2-28

Comparison

2-29

Open and save a workspace

2-30

Workorders

2-31

Templates

2-33

Checks

2-37

Audit

2-39

Datasets

2-41

Navigators

2-42

WPS external interfaces

2-43

Multiuser collaboration

2-45

WPS data sharing

2-47

Bulk provisioning in tabular editor

2-56

WPS case-insensitive import interface

2-57

File browser

2-58

Parameter search

2-59

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-16
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS GUI main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WPS GUI main window


Overview

When opening a WPS session, the main window appears. The user can launch different
GUI commands and access various WPS functions from this desktop window.
Figure 2-3 WPS main window

The WPS main window contains the following parts:

Menu bar (p. 3-9)

Tool bar (p. 3-44)

Instance browser (p. 3-47): Workorders, Network, Checks, Templates and Datasets
tabs

Working area: The WPS working area is composed of the following parts:
Object editor: Overview (p. 3-64)

Object editor: Edition (p. 3-68)

Workorder Panel (p. 3-76)

Template panel (p. 3-83)

Dataset conversion panel (p. 3-86)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-17
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS GUI main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Checks panel (p. 3-88)

Audit panel (p. 3-94)

For more detailed information about the WPS main window and its components, see
WPS main window (p. 3-3).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-18
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Workspace
Overview

The workspace defines the current planning view. The workspace contains all the data
that can be managed within the application:

Network MOI
Template MOI
Workorders

Datasets
Check sessions
Audit sessions
Key masks

Audit profiles
Template masks

The network objects (displayed from the Network tab) are a part of the workspace.
The workspace consists of:

An initial network view (initial snapshot)


Workorders
Templates

Datasets
Check sessions

The main window banner displays the loaded workspace.


WPS allows the user to perform the following operations on a workspace:

Create a new empty workspace. A new empty workorder is automatically created on


creating the workspace. For more information, see Creating a new workspace
(p. 4-6).
Open a workspace. For more information, see Opening a workspace (p. 4-7).
Save a workspace. For more information, see Saving a workspace (p. 4-8).

Network state

The workspace is related to the network states.


The network state refers to the set of network MOIs that can be accessed at a given time
during the provisioning process. The application distinguishes two specific network
states:

The base state, related to the initial state of the workspace.

The current state, related to all modifications performed on the base state.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-19
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The transition between the base state and the current state is stored in the workspace as
workorders.
Figure 2-4 Transition between base state and current state

The base state can either be empty (contains no MOI) or created from an imported
network snapshot.
Once modified, the base state can no longer be browsed within the application. Only the
current state is made available to the user.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-20
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Synchronization

Synchronization deals with the modification of the base state of the workspace. Two cases
of synchronization are taken into account:

Modification of the base state without change of the current state (synchronization
with priority on current state).
Modification of the base state without change of the workorders of the current
workspace (synchronization with priority on workorders).

Network state recomputation

The current network state can be recomputed according to structure changes performed
on the current workspace.
These structure changes can be the following:

Synchronization
Modification of the workorder sequence related to the workspace

Deletion of one or several workorders


Selection of the current workorder

The recomputation is based on the execution on the base network state of all the
workorders defined until the current workorder.
Recomputation calculates the current network state by applying on the base network state
the set of workorders until the current workorder.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-21
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-5 Network state recomputation

Workspace management

For more information, see Workspace management (p. 4-5)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-22
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Dynamic behavior

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Dynamic behavior
WPS GUI

The WPS GUI consists of independent components, which interact by referring to the
same network configuration data and by exchanging the selection and modification
events.
Behavior

The commands are enabled based on the type of object selected. The working parts, such
as wizards and operations, are displayed based on the type of MOIs selected. The
information is displayed based on the ongoing modification of the selected MOI.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-23
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Instance browsers

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Instance browsers
List of MOIs

WPS provides instance browsers to navigate across the different MOIs.


The MOIs are the following:

Network managed object


Workspace
Workorder
Check session

Template
Dataset
Audit session

Instance browser tabs

The instance browsers are displayed within several tabs:


Figure 2-6 Instance browser : tabs

Network tab: displays the entire MOI in a tree.

Workorders tab: displays the workspace and the workorders.

Templates tab: displays the defined templates

Datasets tab: displays the defined datasets

Checks tab: displays the check profiles and the check sessions.

Audit tab: displays the audit profiles and the audit sessions.

For the GUI related to the WPS tabs, see: Instance browser (p. 3-47)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-24
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Generic instantiation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generic instantiation
Usage

WPS provides the user with generic instantiation mechanisms. The user can perform the
following tasks:

Create a child MOI from a selected parent MOI in the network instance browser
Delete an MOI
Copy and paste an MOI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-25
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Object editor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Object editor
Overview

The object editor allows the user to view and modify the attributes of each MOI (Network
MOI, template, MOI of a dataset). Edition is provided for basic configuration of all the
different types of managed objects.
The following tree views are available for the MOIs in the instance browser:

Network tree

Template tree
Dataset tree

The instance browser automatically updates the object editor.


From the object editor, the user can perform the following actions:

View information on a selected parameter

Sort attributes by MOI, parameter name, or value. Sorting allows modification and
comparison of attribute values.

Global update

The global update enables to modify the parameter values of a set of MOIs. The MOIs
must be of the same type and same version.
The set of MOIs must be selected in an instance browser from any of the following tree
views:

Network tree
Template tree
Dataset tree

The object editor part related to these MOIs is automatically updated.


Object editor GUI

For information on the Object editor GUI, see the following sections:

Object editor: Overview (p. 3-64)

Object editor: Edition (p. 3-68)

Template selection at component creation

When a component is created from the object editor, you can select a template. When
WPS prompts you to select the template, the default template is proposed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-26
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Object editor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network object management

For the procedures related to the network object management, see Network objects
(network MOI) management (p. 4-129).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-27
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Tabular editor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tabular editor
Function

The WPS tabular display provides a spreadsheet view.


The tabular editor allows the user to consult and modify the attributes of an MOI
(Network MOI or the MOI of a dataset) of the same type (object class).
The tabular editor is displayed on selecting an MOI in the instance browser. All the
instances of the selected type are displayed within the tabular editor.
The tabular editor allows you to perform the following actions:

Modify the parameter values for a set of MOIs


View information on a selected parameter
Highlight differences between default model values or template values and cell values
within the tabular editor

Use the tabular editor functions


Delete and create a large number of objects in bulk (with import of tables)
Filter a table by the cell values. This is achieved from a contextual menu in the header
column or directly from a cell.
Sort a table by the cell values

Export the content of a table. The table can be exported as an HTML file.
Filter a combo box

For more information on Tabular editor GUI, see Tabular editor capabilities (p. 3-160).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-28
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Comparison

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Comparison
Purpose

The WPS allows the user to perform the comparison of two MOI subtrees of the same
type defined in the workspace.
The user can run the following comparison operations:

Compare two MOIs


Compare an MOI with a template
For more information on how to compare an object with a template, see Compare
with template... (p. 3-22) and Comparing a network object with a template
(p. 4-134).
Compare two templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-29
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Open and save a workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open and save a workspace


Overview

The Open and Save menus allow you to open and save a workspace in the binary format.
The WPS workspaces are saved as <file name>.wps
For more information on managing WPS workspaces, see File (p. 3-10).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-30
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Workorders
The workorders define the evolution of the initial configuration. The workorders
constitute a sequence of elementary provisioning operations, from a single NE attribute
modification to network-wide bulk configurations.
Multiple workorders can be created to define the configuration operations and several
workorders can be merged to define wide transitions.
The example scenarios for the workorder definition are as follows:

Creation of objects and MOIs


Updates to objects and MOIs
Deletion of MOIs and objects

The workorders are saved as XWO files with the following information:

workorder name: Indicates the name of the workorder

originator: Indicates the origin of the workorder

description: Provides a description of the workorder

appName: Indicates the system that generated the workorder, for example, WMS or

WPS.

appRelease: Indicates the application version of the system that generated the

workorder, for example WPS version 2.0


sessionID: Indicates the host name and IP address of the PC, server, ROC, or the
OAM server that generated the workorder.
creationDate: Indicates the date of workorder creation.
The NE or MOI configuration data.
Note: The CM XML file with the XCM extension also contains information on the
snapshot originating system, application name, application release version, creation
date, and name of the snapshot.

The following operations are applicable for the workorders:

Create a new workorder within a workspace.

Delete a workorder - Deleting a workorder allows you to return to the previous


network state.
Import a workorder
Export a workorder

Create a workorder based on the reference workorder


Modify the workorder properties

The Workorders menu bar also allows the following actions:

Create a new workorder

Import a workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-31
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Export a workorder
Show the current workorder

For more information on the Workorders menu commands, see Workorders (p. 3-15).
For information on managing workorders, see Workorder management (p. 4-70).
Inhibiting configuration changes

The MOI configuration changes in a workorder can be withheld or inhibited. WPS does
not apply an inhibited change to the network.
For attribute value changes, the inhibition status can be true or false.
For MOI changes, the following states are applicable:

True - All changes are inhibited

False - No change inhibited


Partial - Some attribute changes inhibited

Inhibited changes are not exported in the XML workorder during the export operation.
For more information on the menu commands for inhibition, see Workorder editor
panel (p. 3-78).
Cloning workorders

The WPS provides the option to define reference workorders and reuse the reference
workorders with the required modifications. The reference workorders can be exported
with the references files, imported into WPS with the required modifications, and applied
to the Network.
The inputs for the workorder cloning operations are as follows:

A reference workorder

A bulk file containing the values of attributes and keys


Note: The workorder cloning feature is available with the WPS_V3_Desktop_
WCDMA_ Advanced license.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-32
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Templates
Overview

With the template instances feature, the WPS provides the ability to define and use a set
of recommended values during the MOI definition.
The template instances store a set of attributes with values, in a structure aligned with the
Resource Model. Attributes that have values within a template are initialized at object
creation. This initialization uses the model initial value and additional sources such as
operations, CM XML interface, and GUI.
The template carries only the recommended values. Attributes with no value within the
template are assigned default values from the initial value of the Resource model.
The WPS allows you to define a recommended value similar to the model initial value.
General information on the templates

The following topics provide more information on templates:

Template identification (p. 2-34)

Template tree (p. 2-34)

Default template (p. 2-34)

Source of template instance and attribute (p. 2-35)

Default template source (p. 2-35)

Implicit templates (p. 2-35)

Template backward compatibility (p. 2-34)

Template distillation mechanism (p. 2-34)

Template migration (p. 2-33)

WPS partial template import and export (p. 2-33)

Template migration

The WPS template migration allows the user to automatically migrate a template from
release N into release N+1. The customized changes are preserved during migration.
For the GUI related to the template migration, see Migrate (p. 3-25) in the Templates
menu.
WPS partial template import and export

The WPS template format evolves. Templates are reduced to values differing from model
default values. Templates therefore focus on explicitly recommended values.
The source field provides information on the origin of each template value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-33
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Template distillation mechanism

WPS provides a distillation mechanism. After the template import, the template values
are compared to the model default values. If the values match, the parameter is removed
from the template. The distillation mechanism restricts the templates to the relevant
parameters.
For the GUI related to the template distillation, see Distill (p. 3-27) in the Templates
menu.
Template backward compatibility

WPS supports backward compatibility for templates managed by previous and the current
versions of WPS. The templates can be directly loaded to a later version of WPS if the
release supports the template version.
Template identification

Several template instances can be defined for the same object type or version. Templates
are identified by:

A name, allocated by the Template originator


The object type they deal with

The name of the associated model (name of the model provided with the domain
specific plug-in)
Version

The name is used to select the Template instances throughout the application. It must
contain indication on its context of use.
Template tree

Templates can define a substructure that maps the network resource model. Such
templates are called template trees.
When creating an object instance from a template tree, the recommended values of the
template are propagated on the root MOI. The template substructure of the children and
the associated recommended values are reproduced on the MOI.
Default template

You can set a template instance as default template for a specific object type and version.
Note: Do not set the template instance, which is used for creating an MOI, as the
default template.
For every object type and version, only one default template instance can be defined.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-34
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Source of template instance and attribute

A source is associated to each template instance and to each valued template attribute.
This source indicates the organization that originated the recommended value.
For attributes not valued in the template, the pseudo source Model is used throughout the
GUI.
For recommended values provided by Alcatel-Lucent, the source takes values among
RD_reserved_nt and eng_reserved_nt. The RD_reserved_nt source indicates that the
end-user must not modify the data. Other sources such as customer for the parameters
listed in the to be filled file.
Default template source

The application maintains a default template source. It is used to automatically initialize


the source while creating or updating templates.
Implicit templates

Implicit templates refer to specific template instances used within the application
operations or wizards. The user can value such templates without modifying their
structure. A specific text file that lists all the implicit templates can be found in the
templates delivered with WPS.
The template name of an implicit template is never displayed in a wizard. The user cannot
select it. The wizards use the implicit templates for the creation or the update of an object.
The operations verify the existence of the implicit templates they refer to, as a
pre-condition of their execution. This protects the application from potential deletion of
implicit templates
Actions on templates

The user can execute the following actions on the templates:

Create new templates from a selected MOI (instance only or instance and sub-tree)
Modify the existing templates
Set a template as the default template to be used during Managed Object (MO)
instantiation and datafill

Set a template as a non-default template


Propagate a selected set of template parameters to a selected set of MOIs

Compare a template with a MOI. Comparison allows the user to propagate parameter
values in a second step.
Compare two templates of the same class. This function is launched from a contextual
menu, on two templates selected in the template tree. It displays the list of differences
in a tabular form.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-35
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Import/export templates in XML format


Clone a template
Delete a template

Distill a template
Migrate a template
Set the source of a template

Template GUI

For the Graphical User Interface related to the templates, see Templates (p. 3-19)
For the Graphical User Interface related to the import of templates, see Importing
templates (p. 3-149).
For the Graphical User Interface related to the export of templates, see Exporting
templates (p. 3-120).
Template management

For the procedures related to the templates, see Templates management (p. 4-46).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-36
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Checks
Overview

The WPS includes a set of checks to verify the consistency of the configuration data. The
checks reduce the risk of service impacts resulting from the incorrect configuration data
applied to the network.
WPS provides syntax checks options. These checks ensure that parameter values are
within the accepted range of values. The checks are automatically executed from the
network models and are run during the edition.
For more information on Checks menu commands, see Checks (p. 3-30).
For the procedures related to the checks, see Checks management (p. 4-100).
For more information about the WPS checks, see WPS Access Checks Description,
UMT/OMC/DD/012066.
Check sessions

The following operations can be performed on a check session:

Create a check session on a set of MOIs


Modify a check session
Delete a check session
Re-run a check session

Add erroneous objects to a dataset


Rename a check session
Enable or disable auto-corrections on the of the check errors
Navigate from a selected error on a check session to the MOI instance in the Object
editor panel.

The check sessions are saved in the current workspace.


For more information, see Checks panel (p. 3-88).
Check profiles

The WPS allows the user to create check profiles. These profiles can be edited, modified,
deleted, and selected before starting a check session.
At the creation, a check profile contains all the checks available in the system. Some of
checks can be removed from the profile.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-37
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The check profile offers the following Tabular editor functions:

Filtering

Sort
Export as HTML

For more information about the Tabular editor functions, see Tabular editor
capabilities (p. 3-160).
The check profile panel allows you to perform the following operations:

Enable or disable a check


Enable or disable all the checks
Activate or deactivate auto-correction of a check error
Filter checks based on a cell value

For more information on check profile, see Check profile panel (p. 3-88).
Checks specific to WPS

The following checks are specific to WPS:

Semantic checks
Checks and rules

Semantic checks

The semantic checks ensure that the configuration settings follow the built-in engineering
rules. These rules apply to the configuration data specific to the NEs and the external
connections between the NEs. The semantic checks can be launched from any MOI.
Checks and rules

The UTRAN-specific checks and rules are available in WPS. The checks and rules are
related to IP and the following UTRAN features:

IMA
Drop and Insert

The naming attribute displayed in the network tree can be customized.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-38
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Audit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Audit
Overview

The Audits feature allows you to compare a network with a set of templates and generate
a report on the differences.
The Audit tab provides the following information:

Audit sessions
Audit profiles
Key masks
Template masks

For more information on the Audits menu commands, see Audits (p. 3-35).
Audit profiles

WPS allows creation, edition, and deletion of audit profiles. You can run an audit session
on an existing audit profile.
An audit profile contains all the templates available in the system when created in WPS.
You can select the templates that are relevant for the profile.
The audit profile provides the Tabular editor view with the following functions:

Filtering
Sort
Export as HTML

For more information about the Tabular editor, see Tabular editor capabilities
(p. 3-160).
The following operations can be performed on an audit profile:

Include or exclude a template


Include or exclude all the templates
Associate a template mask to a template

Associate a key mask to a template


Filter on cell value for a template

For more information on audit profiles, see Audit profile panel (p. 3-94).
Audit sessions

With WPS, the following operations are applicable for an audit session:

Create an audit session on a set of selected MOIs or on the entire network


Delete an audit session

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-39
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Audit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-run an audit session


Add the audited objects to a dataset
Rename an audit session

For more information on audit sessions, see Audit session panel (p. 3-96).
Key masks

WPS allows the creation, edition, deletion, import, and export of key masks. The key
mask allows definition of filtering criteria based on the ID of an object, for a given
template.
For more information on audit key masks, see Key mask panel (p. 3-99).
Template masks

WPS allows the creation, edition, deletion, import, and export of template masks. During
the creation of a template mask, you can select the relevant object from the model. The
attributes for this object can be specified or set. The values set for the attributes can be
compared in the audit session.
For more information on the template masks, see Template mask panel (p. 3-101).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-40
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Datasets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Datasets
Datasets (named Network Element List in the previous edition of the WPS tool) define a
set of instances manipulated by the user.
Actions on the datasets

You can run the following actions on the datasets:

Create a new dataset from one or several MOIs selected from the network tree
Append one or several MOIs to an existing dataset
Remove one or several MOIs from an existing dataset
Create a dataset from a workorder. Inhibited and referred components are excluded.
Create a dataset from a selection in the tabular editor

Delete a dataset
Convert a dataset into another dataset
Run checks on a dataset

Supported converting and filtering rules

The list of supported converting and filtering rules is the following:

Children conversion
Father conversion

Link reference conversion

Dataset creation from check session result

The check session result lists the objects on error. A dataset can be generated from this
list.
Dataset GUI

For the Graphical User Interface related to the datasets, see: Datasets menu.
Dataset management

For the procedures related to the datasets, see the chapter Datasets management
(p. 4-89).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-41
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Navigators

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Navigators
Navigators allow the user to navigate from a selected MOI of the network instance
browser to another logically associated MOI.
The semantic checks, operations, wizards and rules, navigators are business-specific
plug-ins. They are not directly issued from the UTRAN models.

Femto -> FemtoCluster

FemtoCluster -> Cluster


Femto -> profile
Location Area -> Femto
Femto -> Location Area
Femto -> FemtoGroup

FemtoGroup -> Femto

Navigator enhancement

To facilitate the navigation, a graphical area dedicated to the display of navigators is


added to the Network tree.
See: Navigation (p. 3-65) in the Object Editor panel.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-42
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS external interfaces

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WPS external interfaces


Overview

WPS offers CM (Configuration Management) XML interface for import and export
operations. These operations can be launched from a dedicated "Import and Export"
wizard.
XML is an auto-descriptive and extensible language. It has been defined to allow better
interoperability between applications.
CM XML interface for import and export operations

WPS offers CM XML import/export operations.


The CM XML import operations are the following:

Snapshot import:
Replace initial snapshot and discard existing workorders
Merge with planned network
Replace initial snapshot and keep existing workorders
Resynchronize the planned configuration with new snapshot
Template import
Workorder import

The CM XML export operations are the following:

Snapshot export
Reverse XML workorder:

Any XML workorder generated in WPS is exported along with the reverse XML
workorder which contains the exact reverse commands. After a workorder execution
on the OAM server, the execution of the corresponding reverse workorder restores the
initial configuration. Reverse XML workorders constitute a Configuration
Management fallback at the OAM level.
Template export
Workorder export
Dataset export
Subsets of the network or lists of objects defined as datasets in WPS can be exported
in XML snapshot format. They are available to other applications (WPS or others).
This brings flexibility and adds new possibilities in the Configuration Management
process.

Tabular export of import/export reports

Import/export reports can be exported in HTML format (in addition to XML). This allows
the user to retrieve a tabulated report with formatting.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-43
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS external interfaces

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

XML file extensions for WPS

The XML files managed by WPS have the following extensions:

Snapshot: <file name>.xcm


Template: <file name>.xtpl
Workorder: <file name>.xwo

WPS GUI related to the external interfaces

For the WPS Graphical User Interface related to the external interfaces, see: Import and
export wizard (p. 3-103)
Procedures related to the external interfaces

For the procedures related to the WPS external interfaces, see the chapter External
interfaces (p. 4-64)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-44
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Multiuser collaboration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Multiuser collaboration
Overview

The introduction of XML format, workorders, and task-oriented wizards enable multiuser
collaboration.
Several users from different functional teams (RF, transmission) can work on relevant
aspects of the provisioning. The corresponding XML workorder containing individual
updates to the configuration data can be shared in a common workspace repository, to
allow access to multiple users.
Uploading the workorder into another WPS automatically completes the corresponding
instance. The two WPS applications containing the same reference snapshot can also be
stored in the repository.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-45
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Multiuser collaboration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-7 Multiuser collaboration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-46
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WPS data sharing


Overview

The WPS data sharing allows several users to work simultaneously on the common
configuration data.
The individual updates can be updated locally within WPS or the configuration data
updates can be shared in a common workspace repository that allows access to multiple
users. Several users can collaborate simultaneously on a common project, by using a
common workspace repository.
Figure 2-8, WPS data sharing principle (p. 2-48) illustrates the WPS data sharing
principles.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-47
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-8 WPS data sharing principle

In this environment, several versions of the same data can coexist:

The shared version managed by the workspace repository


One or several versions on the local file system

The WPS detects and reports potential conflicts in the data shared by the users.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-48
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For more information on data sharing GUI commands, see Sharing (p. 3-38).
For the procedures related to the data sharing, see Data sharing management (p. 4-32).
WPS data sharing concepts

The WPS data sharing uses the following concepts:

Resources (p. 2-49)

Workspace repository (p. 2-49)

Synchronization status (p. 2-49)

Resources

The WPS data sharing model organizes the data in individual units, called resources. The
resources define the minimum granularity for sharing operations.
The WPS supports the following types of resources:

Workorder
Initial snapshot

The WPS attaches a version number to each shared resource.


Workspace repository

The workspace repository stores and manages all the data sharing resources.
Within the workspace repository, the resources are arranged in shared workspaces. Each
shared workspace can support a collaborative team, with the following capabilities:

A shared workspace can be accessed simultaneously by several users.


Several shared workspaces can be declared in the workspace repository.

A shared workspace differs from a local workspace (published resource), because of the
following reasons:

A shared workspace supports a subset of the local workspace data (the published
resources).
For a shared workspace, the internal format is independent of the WPS binary format,
.wps.

Synchronization status

The synchronization status indicates if the local workspace and the workspace on the
shared repository are synchronized. The synchronization status is indicated through a
specific set of icons.
The WPS also integrates a real-time notification system.
Figure 2-9, Synchronized workspace (p. 2-50) and Figure 2-10, Desynchronized
workspace (p. 2-50) provide examples for the workspace synchronization status.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-49
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-9 Synchronized workspace

Figure 2-10 Desynchronized workspace

Log table
The workspace synchronization status also displays the name of the workspace. On
clicking the name of the shared workspace, a log table is displayed.
The log table shows the actions performed on the shared workspace by the users.
Table 2-1, Contents of the Log table (p. 2-50) lists the contents of a log table.
Table 2-1

Contents of the Log table

Field names

Description

Date

Indicates the date of the shared workspace change.

Resource

Indicates the name of the resource.

Type

Indicates the type of the resource (workspace, snapshot).

Action

Indicates the Created, modified, deleted, and forced


actions.

User

Indicates the name of the user who changed the shared


workspace.

Host

Indicates the host name where the shared workspace is


located.

State

Indicates the status as Desynchronized or Synchronized.

Figure 2-11, Log table (p. 2-51) shows the contents of a log table.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-50
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-11 Log table

The following commands are available from the log table contextual menu:

Purge: Removes entries from the log.

Retrieve: Retrieves and synchronizes the workspace partially or completely.

The table also provides the Tabular Editor functions. For more information on tabular
editor, see Tabular editor capabilities (p. 3-160).
Resource synchronization status

The resource synchronization status refers to the synchronization state between the local
and shared versions of a shared resource.
Table 2-2, Resource synchronization status (p. 2-51) describes the various
synchronization states and provides a list of the corresponding icons in the workorder
tree.
Table 2-2
Icon

Resource synchronization status


Status

Description

Synchronized

Indicates if the resource is aligned


with the workspace repository. All
workspace members can access this
version.

Added in repository

Indicates if the resource is added in


the repository. To propagate this
addition locally, run the Retrieve
command.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-51
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 2-2
Icon

Resource synchronization status

(continued)

Status

Description

Modified in repository

Indicates if the new version of the


resource is available in the
repository. To propagate the changes
locally, run the Retrieve command.

Deleted from repository

Indicates if the resource is deleted


from repository.

Added locally

Indicates if the resource is published


in the repository.

Modified locally

Indicates if the modifications to this


resource are published in repository.
Other workspace members have
access to a different version of this
resource.

Deleted locally

Indicates if the resource is deleted


locally. As the resource deletion is
not synchronized on the repository,
other workspace members can
accesses the resource.

Conflict

Indicates the concurrent activities on


the local version of the resource and
on its shared counterpart. You must
contact the change originator to
resolve the changes.
Examples for the conflict in the
synchronization status are as follows:

Unknown

resource deleted locally and


modified in repository

resource modified locally and


modified in repository

resource modified locally and


deleted in repository

Indicates that the resource


synchronization status is not known.
Verify that the connection parameters
to the shared repository are properly
set and ensure that the repository is
accessible.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-52
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Synchronization operations

According to the resource synchronization status, the users can perform several
synchronization operations.
Table 2-3, Synchronization operations (p. 2-53) provides a list of synchronization
operations available from the WPS GUI.
Table 2-3

Synchronization operations

Operations

Description

Publish resource

Creates a new shared resource or updates its


shared version according to the local version. The
operation is available only when the local and
shared versions are synchronized.

Retrieve resource

Creates or updates the local version of a shared


resource according to its definition in the
repository.

Synchronize workspace

Automatically synchronizes resources by running


the required publish and retrieve operations. The
operation is available if the resources are not in a
conflict status.

Overwrite resource

Forces the publication of a resource even if a


conflict is detected.

For a WPS session, an active connection with the repository is not mandatory. The
connection can be initiated and released for each individual synchronization operation.
Data sharing deployment

The data sharing environment contains the following entities:

One or several WPS applications

Live server workspace repository


HTTP or HTTPS servers used for the file transfer between the WPS and live server
repository
One authentication server

The primary main server with the WMS application is required for this deployment.
The data sharing uses the Apache server part of the WMS for the HTTP or HTTPS file
transfer and as a gateway towards the authentication server.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-53
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data sharing integration with the WMS

The integration of WPS data sharing within WMS requires the following operations:

Deployment of the workspace repository in the WMS main server


Use of the WMS Apache part as the HTTP or HTTPS server and gateway towards the
WMS authentication system
Transparent file transfer between the WPS and WMS activation system
Note: The WPS supports secure HTTPS connections for file transfer. Based on the
WMS configuration, the WPS automatically selects the required access method, either
HTTP or HTTPS, for data exchange with the WMS live server.

The WPS supports multiple sessions with several servers simultaneously.


Figure 2-12, Data sharing integration with WMS (p. 2-54) illustrates the data sharing
process with the WMS.
Figure 2-12 Data sharing integration with WMS

Live server repository

The shared workspace directories are available in the WMS live server repository.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-54
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using the following types of shared workspace directories, the users can exchange
workorders or snapshots between the WPS and WMS applications:

Shared workorder directory


The WPS uses the shared workorder directory for workorder import and export and
the WMS uses the shared workorder directory as a default repository for the
workorder activation.
The shared workorder directory is available at /opt/nortel/data/workspacerepository.
Shared snapshot directory
The WPS uses the shared snapshot directory for remote snapshot import and the
WMS uses the shared snapshot directory for a scheduled snapshot export.
The shared snapshot directory is available at /opt/nortel/data/sheduledExport.

To use a shared workspace repository, the WPS must establish connection with the live
server. For more information establishing connections with the live server repository, see
Setting or changing connection parameters (p. 4-33).
The WPS supports simultaneous sessions with several servers.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-55
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Bulk provisioning in tabular editor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Bulk provisioning in tabular editor


Overview

The WPS tabular editor allows users to copy or paste data in the tabular format from an
external application into the Object editor. The tabular editor supports the creation,
edition, and deletion of the objects and MOIs.
The following operations are available from the contextual menu for the tabular editor:

Create or update using clipboard data

Delete instances using clipboard data


Attention: The Bulk provisioning interface must be limited to minimal configuration
data. This interface is not intended to replace the CM XML interface, which is the
standard interface for data exchange.

Tabulated input file format

The copy or paste operation is based on column name matching. The column headers in
the input file must have the same syntax as the tabular editor. The columns that do not
match are ignored.
However, columns can be arranged in any order. The input file is valid if all identifiers are
present. The missing parameters can be derived from the default template.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-56
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

WPS case-insensitive import interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WPS case-insensitive import interface


Overview

The import interface for CM XML files on WPS tools is case-insensitive.


This feature allows a hassle-free import of CM XML files generated manually or from an
external application.
Attention: The CM XML interface on WMS is case-sensitive.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-57
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

File browser

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

File browser
Overview

When the files (templates, snapshots, workorders) are loaded in the WPS tools for the
first time, the file browser points to a default directory. Browse the file structure to the
requested file.
On subsequent loads, the file selector window is systematically initialized with the latest
selected folder (within a WPS session).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-58
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Parameter search

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Parameter search
Overview

The parameter search offers an easy way to find parameters/objects from the network tree
without an advanced knowledge of the data model.
This functionality is available in the following tabs :

Network tab (p. 3-48)


Templates tab (p. 3-55)

Datasets tab (p. 3-58)

Audit tab (p. 3-62)

Figure 2-13 Search interface

The search area contains four buttons. The following table details the associated actions.
Table 2-4

Search buttons
Icon

Action
Launch the search

Navigate to the previous result

Navigate to the next result

Display search option

It is possible to specify a filter to match only the whole word entered by selecting the
Match whole word radio box option. To display this option click the Display search
option button.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
2-59
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General principles
WPS functions

Parameter search

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-14 Search option

It also integrates a suggestion mechanism that will provide a list of parameters which
begin with or contain the characters entered. This suggestion behavior works with at least
3 characters.
Figure 2-15 Search suggestion mechanism

The search result will highlight the first occurrence matched within the tree and display
the parameter/object information in the object editor.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
2-60
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


3

Overview
Purpose

This part describes the WPS graphical user interface main layout.
Contents
WPS main window

3-3

WPS main window

3-4

Menu bar

3-9

File

3-10

Edit

3-13

Go to

3-14

Workorders

3-15

Templates

3-19

Datasets

3-29

Checks

3-30

Audits

3-35

Sharing

3-38

Help

3-41

Tool bar

3-44

Toolbar contents

3-45

Instance browser

3-47

Network tab

3-48

Workorders tab

3-50

Templates tab

3-55

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-1
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Datasets tab

3-58

Checks tab

3-60

Audit tab

3-62

Object editor: Overview

3-64

Object editor: Edition

3-68

Workorder Panel

3-76

Template panel

3-83

Dataset conversion panel

3-86

Checks panel

3-88

Audit panel

3-94

Import and export wizard

3-103

Exporting key masks

3-104

Export of snapshots

3-110

Exporting template masks

3-117

Exporting templates

3-120

Export of workorders

3-124

Importing key masks

3-129

Importing reference workorders

3-133

Import of snapshots

3-136

Importing template masks

3-147

Importing templates

3-149

Importing workorders

3-153

Report window and progress bar


Overview
Tabular editor capabilities
Overview
Help
Overview

3-158
3-158
3-160
3-160
3-167
3-167

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-2
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


WPS main window

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WPS main window


Overview
Purpose

This section describes the main window of the WPS.


Contents
WPS main window

3-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-3
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


WPS main window

WPS main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WPS main window


Overview

When opening a WPS session, the network tree is empty. The workspace is automatically
initialized with a new empty workorder.
Figure 3-1 WPS main window

The WPS Main window layout consists of the following five parts:

Title bar (p. 3-4)

Menu bar (p. 3-5)

Tool bar (p. 3-5)

Instance browser (p. 3-6)

Working part (p. 3-7)

Title bar

The WPS title bar indicates the title of the application. The title bar also indicates the
local workspace loaded.
The following figure shows the WPS title bar of WPS for Access Network, for a local
workspace.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


WPS main window

WPS main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-2 WPS for Access Network title bar

For a shared workspace, you find the name of this workspace at the right side of the
toolbar:
Figure 3-3 Workspace name

The synchronization status of the selected workorder also appears at the right side of the
workspace name.
Menu bar

This part contains the description of the WPS menus, accessible from the menu bar of
the main window.
The following menus are accessible from the menu bar:

File

Edit

Go to
Workorders

Templates

Datasets

Checks

Audits

Sharing
Help

Tool bar

The Tool bar consists of the following icons from left to right. It also contains information
about the synchronization status of the workspace in case of shared workspace.

New workspace
Open

Save
Synchronize shared workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-5
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


WPS main window

WPS main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Back
Forward
Copy

Paste
Delete
Run check

Compare
Audit...

Instance browser

The instance browser part is split into the six following parts:

Network tab (p. 3-48).

Workorders tab (p. 3-50).

Templates tab (p. 3-55).

Datasets tab (p. 3-58).

Checks tab (p. 3-60).

Audit tab (p. 3-62)

Figure 3-4 Instance browser

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-6
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


WPS main window

WPS main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Working part

The Working part of the main WPS user interface is updated dynamically depending on
the objects selected. The following table describes the various possibilities.
Tabs

Selected object

Displayed Working part

Workorder tab

Workspace folder

None

Initial snapshot

None

Workorders folder

Synchronization state
(Information panel)

Workorder instance

Workorder description part


Workorder editor

Network tab

Managed Object instance

Overview:

Wizards

Operations

Navigation

Children

Change History

Edition part:

Checks tab

Templates tab

Object creation

Object / Tabular editor

Checks folder

None

Checks profile folder

None

Checks profile instance

Check profile part

Checks sessions folder

None

Checks sessions instance

Check session part

Templates folder

None

Template instance

Object editor part

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-7
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


WPS main window

WPS main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tabs

Selected object

Displayed Working part

Datasets tab

Datasets folder

None

Dataset folder instance

Dataset conversion part

Managed Object instance

Overview part:

Wizards

Operations

Navigation

Children

Change History

Edition part:

Object creation

Object / Tabular editor

Figure 3-5 Dynamic behavior on MO selection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-8
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Menu bar
Overview
Purpose

This section describes the menu options accessible from the WPS menu bar.
Contents
File

3-10

Edit

3-13

Go to

3-14

Workorders

3-15

Templates

3-19

Datasets

3-29

Checks

3-30

Audits

3-35

Sharing

3-38

Help

3-41

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-9
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

File

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

File
Overview

The File menu contains the following commands:

New Workspace (p. 3-10)

Open (p. 3-10)

Save (p. 3-10)


Save as (p. 3-11)

Import and export (p. 3-11)

Change settings (p. 3-11)

Set active sub-network (p. 3-12)

Exit (p. 3-12)

New Workspace

Creates a new workspace.


Attention: Creating a new workspace removes the current workspace content.
Open

Opens an existing workspace.


The following data are restored from the workspace:

Objects

Workorders
Templates
Datasets
Check sessions
Audit sessions

The check profiles are not restored.


Save

Saves the current work (workspace) in a binary file (extension file: <file name>.wps).
The following data are saved in the workspace:

Objects
Workorders
Templates

Datasets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-10
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

File

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check sessions
Audit sessions

The check profiles are not saved in the workspace.


Save as

Saves the current work (workspace) in a new binary file.


File extension: <file name>.wps
Import and export

Launches the Import and export wizard (p. 3-103).


Change settings

Changes parameters for the following functions:

Sharing
Template source

Wizard (Automatic creation of workorder on opening wizard)


Transfer (data transfer)
Network tree (automatic grouping options)
Dataset tree (automatic grouping options)

Import and export

Figure 3-6, Change settings (p. 3-12) shows the WPS Settings window.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-11
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

File

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-6 Change settings

Set active sub-network

Allows you to create, rename, remove, and set a sub-network as an active sub-network.
When you import a snapshot into WPS, you can select the sub-network.
Exit

Exits the WPS tool.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-12
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Edit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit
Menu commands

Table 3-1, Edit menu commands (p. 3-13) describes the menu options available under
the Edit menu.
Table 3-1

Edit menu commands

Menu command

Description

Copy

Copies managed objects.

Paste

Pastes managed objects.

Delete

Deletes items selected in the instance browser.


Use the Delete command to delete the following:

Managed objects

Workorders

Templates

Datasets

Check profiles

Check sessions

Audit profiles

Audit sessions

Audit key masks

Audit template masks

Rename

Renames the selected object.

Compare

Compares the selected objects.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-13
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Go to

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Go to
Go to menu commands

Table 3-2, Go to menu commands (p. 3-14) describes the options available in the Go to
menu.
Table 3-2

Go to menu commands

Menu command

Description

Back

Navigates from a selection to the previous one.

Forward

Navigates from a selection to the next one.

Navigate to

Navigates from a managed object to another one.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-14
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Workorders
Overview

The Workorders menu contains the following commands:

Create new workorder... (p. 3-15)

Insert a new workorder before (p. 3-15)

Set a workorder as current (p. 3-15)


Show current workorder... (p. 3-16)

Add modified objects to Dataset (p. 3-16)

Re-compute planning view (p. 3-16)

Inhibit non significant changes (p. 3-16)

Clear inhibition tags (p. 3-16)

Purge inhibited changes (p. 3-16)

Merge workorders (p. 3-16)

Set as reference workorder (p. 3-16)

Merge network changes (p. 3-16)

Export workorder... (p. 3-16)

Repository (p. 3-17)

Go to network object (p. 3-17)

Inhibit network change (p. 3-17)

Disinhibit network change (p. 3-17)

Inhibit changes for sub-tree (p. 3-18)

Disinhibit changes for sub-tree (p. 3-18)

Create new workorder...

Creates a new workorder. The workorder is created in the Workorders tree. This new
workorder becomes the current workorder.
Insert a new workorder before

Inserts a new workorder above the selected workorder.


Set a workorder as current

Re-computes the network from the first workorder of the workspace to the selected one.
New user operations and commands will be performed on the new current workorder.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-15
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show current workorder...

Displays the details and the description of the current workorder. The current workorder
is highlighted in the Workorder tree.
Add modified objects to Dataset

Adds the modified objects to an existing dataset or to a new dataset.


Re-compute planning view

Recomputes the network by applying all the workorders. The recomputation takes into
account the inhibitions the user could have done.
Inhibit non significant changes

Inhibits the changes which are not significant.


Clear inhibition tags

Removes permanently all the inhibition tags in the selected workorder. On clicking this
menu option, the Inhibit boxes are cleared in the Object change panel.
Purge inhibited changes

Removes permanently the inhibited changes from all the workorders.


Merge workorders

Replaces all the selected workorders with a new one.


Attention: The selected workorders must be consecutive.
Merge network changes

Replaces all the active workorders with a new one. This new workorder contains all the
differences between the initial snapshot and the current planning view.
Set as reference workorder

This operation sets the selected workorder as a reference workorder that can be used for
cloning operations.
Export workorder...

Exports the current workorder in CM XML format on either local file system or live
server repository. The exported workorders are saved as <file name>-<sub-networkName> .xwo
File extension:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-16
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Repository

The Repository sub menu provides the following options:

Export reference files - Exports reference workorder as CM XML file and input

mask parameters as .xls file.

Create workorder cloning mask file - Creates bulk inputs file that can be used for

workorder cloning operations.


Generate workorder(s) - Generates workorders after importing a bulk inputs file.
Apply session to network- Applies the session created after workorder generation to

the current network view.

Apply workorders to network - Applies the workorders in the Repository folder to

the current network view.


Export workorder - Exports the workorders in the Repository folder.

Figure 3-7, Repository menu options (p. 3-17) shows the menu commands available in
the Repository sub-menu.
Figure 3-7 Repository menu options

Go to network object

Navigates from the selected object within the workorder to the corresponding object in
the network tree tab of the instance browser.
Inhibit network change

Inhibits a change selected on the workorder editor tree.


Disinhibit network change

Disinhibits a change selected on the workorder editor tree.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-17
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inhibit changes for sub-tree

Inhibits a change (sub-tree level) selected on the workorder editor tree.


Disinhibit changes for sub-tree

Disinhibits a change (sub-tree level) selected on the workorder editor tree.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-18
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Templates
The Templates menu contains the following commands:

Set current source (p. 3-19)

Create template... (p. 3-19)

Duplicate template... (p. 3-21)

Propagate template... (p. 3-21)

Compare with template... (p. 3-22)

Set template as default (p. 3-23)

Do not use template as default (p. 3-24)

Export template... (p. 3-24)

Migrate (p. 3-25)

Distill (p. 3-27)

Set current source

Sets the current source identifier of a template.


Figure 3-8 Set current source

This current source is assigned when a template is created.


Create template...

Creates a template from a MOI in the network tree or from a template in the template tree.
Create template from the network tree
The following window appears to create a template from a MOI selected in the network
tree.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-19
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-9 Template from network tree

The subtree can be added to the template by selecting the Capture subtree box.
Create a template from the templates tree
The following window appears to create a template from a template selected in the
template tree.
Figure 3-10 Template from templates tree

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-20
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Duplicate template...

Clones an existing template.

Propagate template...

Propagates a template (a selected set of attributes) to a selected managed object.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-21
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-11 Propagate template

To propagate an attribute value, click Apply changes.


Attention: Modifying an attribute value from a wizard overrides the template value.
Compare with template...

Compares the attribute values of a managed object with the attribute values of a template.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-22
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-12 Compare with template

Set template as default

Sets a template as default (the default template is used at the managed object creation).
The Default box is selected in the template information table.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-23
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-13 Set template as default

Do not use template as default

Unsets a template as default.


The Default box is deselected in the template information table
Export template...

Exports a template in XML format.


The following figure illustrates the Export template window.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-24
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-14 Export template

The output file is selected from the following window.

File extension: <file name>.xtpl


Migrate

Migrates a template from a source version to another one.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-25
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-15 Migrate template

The following report appears if the template migration is successful.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-26
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-16 Migrate template result

After the template migration, the results on the templates are the following:
1. Template instances have been created and updated in the target version. The
recommended values of the templates, including the one equal to the initial model
value, have been migrated according to the Template Migration Policy.
2. The source of new Template instances and updated attribute has been set to the
Default Template source.
3. The details of the operations performed by the migration (granularity attribute) are
available in the migration report.
4. If the source is marked as default and no default template is defined in target for the
object type, the target template is marked as default.
Distill

Distills a template.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-27
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-17 Distill template

The system removes from the template instances the attribute valued with the model
initial value. It removes the template instance with no valued attribute and no child.
The following report appears if the template distilling is successful.
Figure 3-18 Distill template result

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-28
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Datasets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Datasets
Datasets menu

Table 3-3, Datasets menu (p. 3-29) describes the Datasets menu commands.
Table 3-3

Datasets menu

Menu command

Description

Add to dataset

Adds the selected managed object to a new or


an existing dataset.

Create inventory dataset

Creates a dataset for the hardware inventory


imported into WPS.

Remove from dataset

Removes an object from a dataset.

Remove all objects from network

Removes all the managed objects of the


selected dataset from the network.

Go to

Goes to the selected object of a dataset in the


network tree.

Export as CM XML

Exports a dataset in a CM XML file, with the


following option:

Dataset instances only

Dataset instances with their subtrees

The exported dataset file is saved as <file


name>.xcm
Export as CSV

Exports a dataset in the CSV format.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-29
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Checks
The Checks menu contains the following commands:

Run checks (p. 3-30)

Rerun check session (p. 3-33)

Add erroneous objects to dataset (p. 3-33)

Delete all check sessions (p. 3-33)

Create check profile (p. 3-33)

Duplicate (p. 3-33)

Delete all profiles (p. 3-33)

Set as default (p. 3-34)

Reset as default (p. 3-34)

Save all profiles (p. 3-34)

Run checks

Runs a check session on a set of selected MOIs. An object or a dataset must be selected.
The Checks panel appears.
To run the check, you must click on OK.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-30
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-19 Checks panel

This panel displays the following information:

Checks performed on: the name of the checked object

Model checks (p. 3-31)

Engineering checks (p. 3-32)

Check description (p. 3-32)

Model checks

You can set or unset the following check options:

Mandatory attributes defined

Link targets defined


Case of link attributes valid (autofix)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-31
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Containment valid (min, max)


Required components defined
Create required components (Autofix)

The model checks can be activated or deactivated.


Engineering checks

This part is split into:

Profile: You can:

select an existing check profile


You must apply the check profile.
create a new check profile

List of checks:

This is the list of checks you can select. By default, all the checks are selected.
You can enable or disable a check.
The Checks session window also displays following two check boxes:

Enabled - To enable automatic fixing of check errors

Autofix - To fix check errors automatically

The created Check session is available from the Checks tab. The new check session can
be displayed from the check sessions tree.
Check description

This part gives the following information on the checks:

Name

Check name

Id

Check identity

Domain

BCR

Description

Check description

Action

Action to fix the configuration error detected by the check

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-32
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check errors panel

The Check errors panel displays the check failure error messages. Based on the severity
of check failure errors, the following types messages are displayed on the Check session
window:

Error messages

Warning messages
Information messages

Rerun check session

Reruns a check session selected in the tree of the check sessions.


Add erroneous objects to dataset

Adds the erroneous objects in the selected check session to an existing or a new dataset.
Delete all check sessions

Deletes all the check sessions.


Confirmation is requested to the user.
Create check profile

Creates a new check profile.


The Check profile panel appears.
Figure 3-20 Check profile

Duplicate

Duplicates the selected check profile.


You must enter a new name for the duplicated profile.
Delete all profiles

Deletes all the existing check profiles.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-33
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set as default

Sets a check profile as a default profile.


Reset as default

Resets the profile that is set as default.


Save all profiles

Saves the existing check profiles.


Attention: The check profiles are automatically saved when quitting WPS.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-34
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Audits

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Audits
Audits menu

The Audits menu contains the following commands:

Audit... (p. 3-35)

Re-run audit session (p. 3-36)

Add audited objects to dataset (p. 3-36)


Delete all audit sessions (p. 3-36)

Duplicate (p. 3-37)

Delete all profiles (p. 3-37)

Save all profiles (p. 3-37)

Audit...

Runs an audit session on a set of selected MOIs. An object or a dataset must be selected
(the network object can be selected).
The Audit panel appears on clicking Audit. Figure 3-21, Audit panel (p. 3-36) provides
an example for the Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-35
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Audits

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-21 Audit panel

This panel displays the following information:

Audit performed on: the name of the audited objects

Audited types

To run the Audit session, click OK.


Re-run audit session

Re-runs an audit session selected in the tree of the audit sessions.


Add audited objects to dataset

Adds the audited objects in the selected audit session to an existing or a new dataset.
Delete all audit sessions

Deletes all the audit sessions.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-36
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Audits

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Duplicate

Creates a copy of an existing audit profile.


Delete all profiles

Deletes all the existing audit profiles.


Save all profiles

Saves the existing audit profiles.


Attention: The audit profiles are automatically saved when quitting WPS.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-37
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Sharing
Sharing menu

The Sharing menu contains the following commands:

Create shared workspace (p. 3-38)

Open shared workspace (p. 3-39)

Delete shared workspace (p. 3-39)


Refresh resource synchronization status (p. 3-39)

Synchronize shared workspace (p. 3-40)

Publish resource (p. 3-40)

Retrieve resource (p. 3-40)

Make local copy (p. 3-40)

Create shared workspace

Creates a shared workspace.


On clicking Create shared workspace, the Shared connection parameters window is
displayed. You can connect to the WMS main server by using this window as shown in
Figure 3-22, Connect to a live server (p. 3-39).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-38
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-22 Connect to a live server

After connecting to the live server, you can create a shared workspace.
Open shared workspace

Opens a shared workspace.


Delete shared workspace

Deletes a shared workspace.


Refresh resource synchronization status

Refreshes the resource synchronization status.


Attention: Refresh the synchronization status of a resource before retrieving the
resource.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-39
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Synchronize shared workspace

Synchronizes the shared workspace.


Publish resource

Publishes a resource into the workspace repository.


Retrieve resource

Retrieves a resource from the workspace repository.


Make local copy

Creates a local copy of the shared workspace.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-40
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Help

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Help
The Help command allows you to display the version of the tool.
The Help menu contains the following commands:

Licenses... (p. 3-41)

Help (p. 3-42)


About (p. 3-42)

Licenses...

The following screenshot shows the result of the Licenses... command.


Figure 3-23 Licenses: WPS for Small Cells

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-41
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Help

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Help

The following screenshot shows the result of the Help command.


Figure 3-24 Help: WPS for Small Cells

To know more on the help functionality, see the Help (p. 3-167) chapter.
About

The following figure illustrates an example of information provided by this command:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-42
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Menu bar

Help

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-25 About

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-43
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Tool bar

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tool bar
Overview
Purpose

This section describes the options available form the tool bar.
Contents
Toolbar contents

3-45

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-44
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Tool bar

Toolbar contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Toolbar contents
Overview

The WPS floating toolbar can be placed on different borders of the main window.
To move the toolbar, click near the toolbar button and drag and drop the toolbar to the
desired location on the WPS main window.
Figure 3-26, WPS main Toolbar (p. 3-45) shows the toolbar.
Figure 3-26 WPS main Toolbar

Table 3-4, Toolbar (p. 3-45) lists the toolbar options:


Table 3-4

Toolbar

Options

Icon

Description

New workspace

Creates a new workspace.


Only one workspace can be
opened at a time.

Open...

Opens an existing workspace.

Save

Saves the current work


(workspace) in a binary file,
.wps. The workspace file
includes the following:

Synchronize shared
workspace

Templates

Workorders

Network

Datasets

Check sessions

Audit sessions

Synchronizes workorders and


workspace with the server.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-45
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Tool bar

Toolbar contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-4

Toolbar

Options

(continued)
Icon

Description

Back and Forward

Navigates from one selection


to another one. The user can
easily navigate between
different trees.

Copy

Copies an MOI.

Paste

Pastes an MOI.

Delete

Deletes an object such as


workorder, checks session,
audit session, and MOI.

Run checks...

Runs a checks session from a


set of selected MOIs.

Compare...

Compares two selected MOIs.

Audit...

Audits the selected MOI.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-46
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Instance browser
Overview
Purpose

This section describes the Instance browser menu options.


Contents
Network tab

3-48

Workorders tab

3-50

Templates tab

3-55

Datasets tab

3-58

Checks tab

3-60

Audit tab

3-62

Object editor: Overview

3-64

Object editor: Edition

3-68

Workorder Panel

3-76

Template panel

3-83

Dataset conversion panel

3-86

Checks panel

3-88

Audit panel

3-94

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-47
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Network tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network tab
The network tab provides a graphical representation of the entire network in a tree. It
enables the user to navigate among the different instances and to select MOIs in order to
launch commands.
Figure 3-27 Network tab

These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar or the contextual
menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibilities

Object's attributes edition


Wizards and Operations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-48
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Network tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Copy, paste, and delete


Export the selected MOI as CMXML file
Group / Ungroup MOI

The following icon represents a group of nodes.

The Group / Ungroup option is available in the contextual menu for each MOI. Auto
grouping is also available. The threshold can be set in WPS Settings panel. Group /
Ungroup actions do not take threshold into account. The Arrange subtree action takes
threshold into account.

Group by type

Ungroup
Arrange subtree sub-menu

An object can be easily found in the tree by using the find function at the top of the tab.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-49
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorders tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Workorders tab
WPS provides a graphical representation of the workspace in a tree. It contains the
following:

The initial snapshot


A subtree representing the list of created workorders

It enables the user to navigate among the different instances and to launch commands.
Figure 3-28 Workorders tab

These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar, or the contextual
menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibility:

Create a new workorder

Delete a workorder
Export all workorders
Add modified object to dataset

See the Workorders (p. 3-15) menu section for more information.
An object can be found in the tree by using the find function at the top of the tab.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-50
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorders tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

From a selected workorder, the user can decide to set it as the current one. This function
will re-compute all the network from the initial snapshot to the selected workorder. All
the following workorders will not be taken into account (these workorders will be
displayed in gray color).
Figure 3-29 Workorders - set current

The user can inhibit (or disinhibit) changes on a workorder. The workspace can be then
de-synchronized. This means that the current planning view (the network tree) is not the
exact result of the execution of the workorders on the initial snapshot. The planning view
must be re-computed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-51
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorders tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-30 Workorders - inhibit changes

The workorder with inhibited changes is displayed in blue and the workorder folder is
displayed in red.
Consecutive workorders can be merged in one workorder. This function is accessible in
the contextual menu or the menu bar.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-52
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorders tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-31 Workorders - merge

WPS will prompt the user to save the current workspace.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-53
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorders tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-32 Workorders - merge dialog box

The result is a workorder that contains all the modifications of the selected workorders to
merge.
Figure 3-33 Workorders - merge result

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-54
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Templates tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Templates tab
The templates tab provides a graphical representation of the template in a tree.
It enables the user to navigate among the different instances of template and to launch
commands.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-55
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Templates tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-34 Templates tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-56
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Templates tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar or the contextual
menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibility:

Template's attributes edition


Set template as default
Set template as non-default

Duplicate a template
Delete a template
Export a template
Migrate
Distill

Set to current source

The contextual menu available from the Templates tab also provides the options to
expand or collapse the template tree.
For more information on the Templates menu options, see Templates (p. 3-19).
An object can be found easily within the templates tree by using the find function at the
top of the Templates tab.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-57
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Datasets tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Datasets tab
The datasets tab provides a graphical representation of the datasets in a tree. Each dataset
is displayed as a sub-tree containing a set of (heterogeneous) managed objects.
The Datasets tab allows the user to navigate through different instances and launch
commands.
Figure 3-35 Datasets tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-58
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Datasets tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar or the contextual
menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibility:

Launch dataset conversion


Export as CM XML snapshot
Remove All objects from network

The following list gives an example of some of the accessible operations:

Wizards
Operations
Navigation
Object creation

Component's attributes edition

An object can be found easily within the datasets tree by using the find function at the top
of the Datasets tab.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-59
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Checks tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Checks tab
The checks tab provides a graphical representation of objects related to the checks
functionality in a tree.
The Checks tab contains the following:

A sub-tree containing the list of checks profiles


A sub-tree containing the list of check sessions

Figure 3-36 Checks tab

The Checks tab enables the user to navigate among the different instances and launch
commands.
These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar or the contextual
menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibility:

Create a check profile


Delete a check profile
Save all profiles

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-60
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Checks tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Duplicate, rename a check profile


Delete a check session

An object can be easily found in the tree by using the find function at the top of the tab.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-61
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Audit tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Audit tab
The audit tab provides a graphical representation of objects related to the audit
functionality in a tree.
It contains:

A sub-tree containing the list of Audit profiles

A sub-tree containing the list of Audit sessions

A sub-tree containing the list of Key masks

A sub-tree containing the list of Template masks

Figure 3-37 Audit tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-62
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Audit tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

It enables the user to navigate among the different instances and to launch commands.
These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar or the contextual
menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibility:

Create an audit profile


Save all profiles

Duplicate, rename an audit profile


Re-run an audit session
Add audited objects to dataset
Creating key masks
Creating template masks

An object can be easily found in the tree by using the find function at the top of the tab.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-63
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Object editor: Overview


The Object editor: Overview tab displays an object in an overview layout.
Figure 3-38 Object editor: Overview panel

Operations

The Operations area contains links to the available operations for the selected object.
The following figure shows the operations available for the FGW.
Figure 3-39 Operations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-64
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Navigation

The Navigation area contains links to the objects related to the selected object.
The following figure shows an example of navigation options for FGW
Figure 3-40 Navigation

Children

The Children area shows the child objects for a selected object. For each child object, this
table contains the following:

the number of created objects (if any)


links to these objects in the network tree

The following figure provides a view of the supported child objects.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-65
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-41 Children

Change history

The Change history area shows the history of the changes for the selected object and
provides links to the related workorders.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-66
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-42 Change history

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-67
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Object editor: Edition


The Edition tab displays an object in a tabular view.
Figure 3-43 Object editor: Edition panel

The Object editor: Edition panel contains the following parts:

Object creation (p. 3-69)

Object attributes (p. 3-69)


This part displays in a table the attribute values of the selected object.
Attribute details (p. 3-74)
This part displays the details of a selected attribute.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-68
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Object creation

This part allows you to create the child objects of a selected object.
The following figure shows an example of object creation for a Network.
Figure 3-44 Object creation

Object attributes

This part displays in a table the attribute values of the selected object.
This part uses a tabular editor. For more information on the Tabular editor capabilities,
see: Tabular editor capabilities (p. 3-160).
The object attributes can be displayed:

by instance (p. 3-69)

by type (p. 3-71)

by instance

The attributes of selected objects are displayed in a table containing for each line the
following columns:

object name
attribute name
attribute value

Figure 3-45 Object attributes: by instance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-69
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Selecting a MOI in an instance browser (network tree and dataset tree) updates the tabular
editor part. All the instances of the selected type are displayed within the tabular editor.
The table may contain the attribute values of several objects.
You can modify the value of several attributes of the same type in one operation. The
attributes must be selected within the tabular editor.
Figure 3-46 Multi-value modification from tabular editor

It is then possible to compare attribute values between one or several objects. This is done
thanks to the sort mechanism on the column headers.
The following screenshot shows a sort from the Attribute column.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-70
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-47 Sort mechanism on column header

by type

The selected objects in the network tree are displayed in a table containing the following
columns:

Object type
Sub-object type

Version
Model
Object attributes: one column per attribute

Only the first selected object type is displayed.


All the objects of the network with the selected type are displayed in this table. For the
selected objects in the network tree, the cell containing the object name is displayed in
blue.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-71
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-48 Object attributes: by type

Contextual menu by type


When selecting a line in the table, with the option by type ticked off, the following
commands are available from a contextual menu:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-72
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Add selected instances to dataset

Delete selected instances

Add shown instances to dataset

Create/update instances using clipboard

Delete instances using clipboard

Table display

Export table as HTML

Add selected instances to dataset


Adds the selected instances to an existing or a new dataset.
Delete selected instances
Deletes the selected node.
Add shown instances to dataset
Adds all the displayed instances to an existing or a new dataset.
Create/update instances using clipboard
Creates or updates the instances using the clipboard.
The clipboard must contain a table formatted as follows:

Identification columns are mandatory.


A version column, model column and attribute column may be specified if needed.
A tabulation separates each column.

Delete instances using clipboard


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-73
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The clipboard must contain a table formatted as follows:

Identification columns are mandatory.

A version column and attribute columns may be specified if needed.


A tabulation separates each column.

Table display
Refer to the Tabular editor capabilities: Table display (p. 3-161)
Export table as HTML
Refer to the Tabular editor capabilities: Export table as HTML (p. 3-163)
Attribute details

This part displays the details of the selected attribute(s):

attribute description (type, range)


more detailed attribute description (via the "Description" button)
edition field allowing you to modify the value

The Unset button allows you to unset a parameter value. In case of multi-edition on
different kinds of attributes, a message warns you that no operation is available.
On selecting an attribute, either by instance or by type, the impact information appears
along with the attribute description and status.
Figure 3-49 Attribute details

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-74
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-50 Attribute description

Attribute input panel data types

A "Hex" check box allows you to switch the input/output of the attribute input panel from
default data type (described in the RAN Model) to hexadecimal. The persisted data types
and the data types exported in the CM XML file are still those defined in the RAN Model.
This functionality is applicable to all data types compatible with an integer:

Decimal (Integer only. Float numbers are not supported).


Long Integer.
Signed Integer.

BitString.
Bcd.

Figure 3-51 Attribute input panel data types

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-75
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Workorder Panel
The Workorder panel contains the two following parts:

Workorder description panel (p. 3-77)

Workorder editor panel (p. 3-78)

This panel appears on workorder selection


Figure 3-52 Workorder panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-76
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Workorder description panel


Figure 3-53 Workorder description panel

This panel displays information about the selected workorder within the workspace tree.
This panel is split into:

Name

Name of the workorder. By default the name is new workorder.

Originator

Originator name. You can fill in or modify this information (optional).

Creation date

The date of creation. The system automatically computes this information.

Description

Workorder description. You can fill in or modify this information (optional).


You must click Apply to save the modifications.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-77
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Workorder editor panel


Figure 3-54 Workorder editor panel

This panel contains the following parts:

Network change tree (p. 3-79)

Object change panel (p. 3-81)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-78
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network change tree


Figure 3-55 Network change tree

The Network change tree displays the objects that are in the following status:

created
updated
deleted

Inhibit/Disinhibit changes in a workorder


On selecting a change in the network change tree, the following commands are available
from a contextual menu:
Figure 3-56 Inhibit/Disinhibit changes in a workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-79
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following commands are available from the contextual menu:

Expand subtree

Expands the subtree of the network change tree.

Collapse subtree

Collapses the subtree of the network change tree.

Go to network object

Goes to the associated object in the network tree.

Inhibit network change

Inhibit the selected network change without including the subtree.

Disinhibit network change

Disinhibit the selected network change without including the subtree.

Inhibit changes for subtree

Inhibit the selected network changes including the subtree.

Disinhibit changes for subtree

Disinhibit the selected network changes including the subtree.


The workspace can be then desynchronized. The current planning view is not the exact
result of the execution of the workorders on the initial snapshot.
The planning view must be recomputed. This is possible from the "Workorders" object.
An example of unsynchronized workspace is provided in the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-80
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-57 Unsynchronized workspace

Workorders with inhibited changes are displayed in blue within the workorder tree. The
workorder folder is displayed in red.
Object change panel

The object change panel contains the following columns:

Type

Object type

Object

Object modified

Method

Operation:

create
delete
update

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-81
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Attribute

Object attribute modified

Previous value

Attribute value before change

Value

New attribute value

Inhibit

Change in the workorder is inhibited or not.

Model

Parameter default value in the model

Template

Parameter default value in the template


The model and template columns are displayed by selecting the show model/templates
value box.
The impact information is displayed on selecting the Show impact check box.
Tabular editor
The object changes are displayed in a tabular editor.
For more information on the tabular editor capabilities, see Tabular editor capabilities
(p. 3-160)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-82
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Template panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Template panel
The template edition panel allows you to edit the values of the template attributes.
This panel contains the two following parts:

Template information panel (p. 3-83)

Template edition panel (p. 3-84)

Template information panel

The template information panel is shown in the following screenshot.


Figure 3-58 Template information panel

This table contains the following columns:

Version

Version of the object related to the selected template

Model

Model of the object related to the selected template

Short type

Type (in short) of the object related to the selected template

Name

Template name

Source

Source related to the template. It is assigned at the template import or creation.

Default

Indicates if the template is a default template. It can be changed.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-83
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Template panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hierarchy

Template hierarchy. It indicates if the template has a subtree.

Long type

Type (complete) of the object related to the selected template


Template edition panel
Figure 3-59 Template edition panel

This table contains the following columns:

Object

Object related to the template

Attribute

Object attribute in the template

Value

Attribute value in the template


You can change the attribute value. See: Figure 3-60, Attribute value change
(p. 3-85)

Included

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-84
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Template panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Indicates if the attribute is included in the template. Included attributes are bolded.
This state can be changed manually.

Source

Source related to the setting of the attribute.


On selecting an attribute either by instance or by type, impact information is displayed
along with attribute description and status.
Figure 3-60 Attribute value change

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-85
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Dataset conversion panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Dataset conversion panel


The Dataset conversion panel is displayed on the dataset selection (within the dataset
tab). You must select a dataset in the dataset tree.
Figure 3-61 Dataset conversion panel

This panel allows you to convert a dataset. The result of the conversion (set of MOIs) can
be saved into a new dataset or into the current selected dataset.
To convert a dataset, you must run the following actions:

Select a dataset instance in the dataset instance browser


Select the type of object from which the navigation has to start

Select the navigator to use to perform the conversion

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-86
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Dataset conversion panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the type of objects to keep in the output dataset


Select the dataset where objects are added

On selecting an attribute either by instance or by type, impact information is displayed


along with attribute description and status.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-87
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Checks panel
Overview

The Checks panel contains the following parts:

Check profile panel

Check session panel

Check profile panel

Figure 3-62, Check profile panel (p. 3-88) provides a view of the Check profile panel.
Figure 3-62 Check profile panel

The check profile allows the user to perform the following activities:

Enable or disable a check


Enable or disable all the checks
Activate or deactivate the autofix characteristic for a check

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-88
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The check profile panel provides a tabular editor. For more information on tabular editor,
see Tabular editor capabilities (p. 3-160).
Contextual menu

Contextual menu (p. 3-89) describes the commands available from the contextual menu
of the Check profile panel:
Menu command

Description

Enable

Enables the check in the check profile.

Disable

Disables the check in the check profile.

Enable all

Enables all the checks in the check profile.

Disable all

Disables all the checks in the check profile.

Fix ON

Sets the autofix capability in the check profile.

Fix OFF

Unsets the autofix capability in the check profile.

Table display

Display the details in a tabular format. For more information, see


Table display (p. 3-161).

Export Table

Enables you to export the table in .html, .xls, or .xlsx formats.

Check session panel

Figure 3-63, Check session panel (p. 3-90) provides a view of the Check session panel.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-89
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-63 Check session panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-90
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-5, Check session panel contents (p. 3-91) describes the contents of the Check
session panel.
Table 3-5

Check session panel contents

Contents of the Check


session panel

Description

Check session identification

This part contains the following items:

Session performed on- Indicates the object selected for

the check.

Sub-network - Indicates the sub-network on which the

check session is run.

Creation date - Indicates the date when the check was

created.
On clicking Re-run check session, WPS reruns the selected
check session.
On clicking Save report, the check session report is saved in
the XML format.
Check errors

Check description

The details of the checks and check errors are displayed in the
following tabs:

Failures

Checks

Difference

The following information on a check is available in the


Check Description part:

Name - Name of the check

Id - Identity of the check

Description - Description of the check

Action - Action required to resolve the check error.

The following check boxes are available for filtering check


errors:

Hide model errors - Selecting this check box hides model

errors.

Hide Warnings - Selecting this check box hides warnings

Hide info messages - Selecting this check box hides

information messages.
Checks status

Displays the status of the checks that are run by WPS.


The Checks status panel also displays the number of errors,
warnings, and information messages for a check session

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-91
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check errors

A part of the Checks session panel provides a list of the checks run, checks that failed,
and difference, if any, between two check sessions.
Check errors (p. 3-92) describes the contents of the check errors part.
Tab

Description

Failures

Indicates the number of checks that failed and provides details on


the check errors.
The table contains the following columns:

Severity: Indicates the severity of the error

Check ID: Refers to identity of the check.

This field is empty for a model check. The model checks are
inferred from the model and are automatically performed on
each check session.

Domain: Indicates the domain

Object: Refers the object selected for the check

Attribute: Refers to the object attribute related to the check

Message: Describes the error detected in the check

Fixed: Highlights status of autocorrection if the autofix is

enabled for the check.


Checks

Provides details about the errors in a check session.


The check session details table contains the following columns

Category: Indicates the category of the check

Check ID: Indicates the identity of the check

Error: Indicates error, if any.

Warning: Indicates warning, if any

Info: Indicates information messages, if any

Domain: Indicates the domain

Check: Provides a description of the check

Enabled: Indicates if the check is enabled.

Autofix: Indicates if the autocorrection was enabled for any

check.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-92
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tab

Description

Difference

Indicates the differences, if any, from the previous check sessions:


The differences table contains the following columns:

Changes - Indicates the changes

Severity: Indicates the severity of the check errors

Check ID: Indicates the identity of the check

Domain: Indicates the domain

Object: Refers to the object selected for the check

Attribute: Refers to the object attribute related to the check

Message: Describes the error detected in the check

Contextual menu

The following commands are available from the contextual menu:

Add selected objects to dataset - Adds the objects related to the selected errors to

an existing or new dataset.

Add shown objects to dataset - Adds all the objects displayed in the check session

errors to a dataset.
Table display - Displays the content in the WPS tabular editor.
Export table.. - Exports the selected check session in the Excel format.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-93
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Audit panel

Audit profile panel (p. 3-94)

Audit session panel (p. 3-96)

Key mask panel (p. 3-99)

Template mask panel (p. 3-101)

Audit profile panel


Figure 3-64 Audit profile panel

The audit profile allows the user to achieve the following operations:

include/exclude a template
include/exclude all the templates

associate a template mask to a template


filter on cell value for a template

The audit profile panel uses a tabular editor.


For more information on the tabular editor capabilities, see: Tabular editor capabilities
(p. 3-160)
Contextual menu from Audit profile panel

When selecting an audit profile in the audit profile panel, the following commands are
available from a contextual menu:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-94
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-65 Contextual menu from audit profile panel

Include

Includes the template in the Audit profile.

Exclude

Excludes the template in the Audit profile.

Include all

Includes all the templates in the Audit profile.

Exclude all

Excludes all the templates in the Audit profile.

Duplicate

Duplicates a template.

Remove

Removes a template.

Table display

Refer to Table display (p. 3-161) in the tabular editorcapabilities.

Export table as HTML

Exports the selected check profile in HTML format.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-95
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Audit session panel


Figure 3-66 Audit session panel

The Audit Session panel contains the following parts:

Audit session identification (p. 3-97)

Report tab (p. 3-97)

Audited types tab (p. 3-99)

You can save the Audit session in a zip file.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-96
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Audit session identification


Figure 3-67 Audit session identification

This part contains the following items:

Session performed on

Identity of the object selected for the audit

Creation date

Creation date of the audit

Re-run audit session

Re-runs a selected audit session.

Save audit session

Saves the audit session in a zip file format.


Report tab

This panel is split in two tab:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-97
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-68 Report tab

This panel is the report generated by the audit session. It consists in html pages with links
which allow an easy navigation in the audited object(s).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-98
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Audited types tab


Figure 3-69 Audited types tab

This tab displays the options defined in the profile chosen when the audit is launched.
Key mask panel
Figure 3-70 Audit key mask panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-99
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

In this panel, a set of filter rules can be defined on the id of an object. This key mask can
be then applied to a template on the Audit profile panel (p. 3-94).
This part contains the following items:

Case sensitive
Activates or deactivates the case sensitive
AND/OR
Logical conditions between the different rules
Add
Adds a condition in the table
Remove
Removes a condition in the table

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-100
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Template mask panel


Figure 3-71 Template mask panel

Contextual menu from Audit Template Masks panel

When selecting an audit profile in the audit profile panel, the following commands are
available from a contextual menu:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-101
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-72 Contextual menu from Audit Template Masks panel

Include selected attribute

Includes the selected template attribute in the Audit profile.

Exclude selected attribute

Excludes the selected template attribute in the Audit profile.

Table display

Refer to Table display (p. 3-161) in the tabular editor capabilities.

Export table as HTML

Exports the selected check profile in HTML format.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-102
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Import and export wizard


Overview
Purpose

A dedicated wizard allows you to launch import and export operations. This wizard helps
you to define the operations to perform.
Contents
Exporting key masks

3-104

Export of snapshots

3-110

Exporting template masks

3-117

Exporting templates

3-120

Export of workorders

3-124

Importing key masks

3-129

Importing reference workorders

3-133

Import of snapshots

3-136

Importing template masks

3-147

Importing templates

3-149

Importing workorders

3-153

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-103
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting key masks


Purpose

This procedure describes how to export the key masks.


Note: The export of key masks allows the user to export key filter defined in the
Audit tab in the CM XML format.
Steps to export key masks

Perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the File menu, select Import and export.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-104
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Import and export wizard: export key masks window appears as

shown in Figure 3-73, Import and export wizard: export key masks (p. 3-105).
Figure 3-73 Import and export wizard: export key masks

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Export key masks option.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-105
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Export key masks (local file system) window appears as shown in

Figure 3-74, Export key masks (local file system) (p. 3-106).
Figure 3-74 Export key masks (local file system)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse to select a file.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-106
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Select a file window appears as shown in Figure 3-75, Select a file

(p. 3-107).
Figure 3-75 Select a file

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter a filename to export the key masks.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-107
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Export key masks : Start window appears as shown in Figure 3-76,

Export key masks : Start (p. 3-108).


Figure 3-76 Export key masks : Start

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Start to launch the key masks export.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-108
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The progress and completion of the key masks export is displayed as shown in

Figure 3-77, Export key masks: Completed (p. 3-109).


Figure 3-77 Export key masks: Completed

You can save the report related to the key masks export (XML format).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-109
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Export of snapshots
The export of snapshots allows you to export snapshots in the CM XML format.
To export a snapshot, you must run the following actions:

In the File menu, select Import and export.


The Figure 3-78, Import and Export Wizard: export snapshot (p. 3-111) window
appears.
Select the Export snapshot option.
Click Next.
The Figure 3-79, Export snapshot (local file system) (p. 3-112) window appears.
Click Browse to select the path to export the network snapshots. Enter a filename to
export the snapshots.
Click Next. The Figure 3-80, Edit Filter (p. 3-113) window appears.
Select the filter by clicking on Edit filter tab. The Figure 3-81, Select Filter
(p. 3-114) window appears.
Select a subset of top-level objects to export.
Click Start. The progress and completion of the snapshot export is shown in the
Figure 3-83, Export snapshot: Completed (p. 3-116) window.
You can save the report related to the snapshot export (XML format).
Note: You can set the filter to provide snapshots based on category of small cells. The
categories of small cells are: H- Home, E- Enterprise, M- Metro, and LRM Metro
(Light Radio).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-110
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-78 Import and Export Wizard: export snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-111
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-79 Export snapshot (local file system)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-112
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-80 Edit Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-113
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-81 Select Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-114
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-82 Export snapshot: Start

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-115
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-83 Export snapshot: Completed

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-116
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting template masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting template masks


Purpose

The purpose of this section is describe the procedure for exporting template masks from
the WPS.
Note: The export of template masks allows you to export templates filter defined in
the Audit tab in the CM XML format.
Steps to export template masks

Perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the File menu, select Import and export.


The Import and export wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Export template masks option and click Next.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-117
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting template masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Export template masks (local file system) window appears as shown in

Figure 3-84, Export template masks (local file system) (p. 3-118).
Figure 3-84 Export template masks (local file system)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse to select a file.


The Select a file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter a filename to export the template.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Start to launch the template export.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-118
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting template masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

You can save the report related to the template export (XML format).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-119
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting templates
Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to export templates from the WPS.


The export template operation allows you to export templates in the CM XML format.
Template export operation

You can use any of the following options to export the WPS templates:

The Export templates option in the Import and Export wizard.

The Export template option, which is available from the contextual menu on
selecting a template in the templates tree and from the Templates main menu.
The Export all templates option available from the Templates root contextual menu.

This section describes the procedure to export templates through the Import and Export
wizard.
Steps to export templates

Perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the File menu, select Import and export.


Result: The Import and export wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Export template option and click Next.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-120
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Select source for export window appears as shown in Figure 3-85,

Select source for export (p. 3-121).


Figure 3-85 Select source for export

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the template sources to export.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.
The Export templates (local file system) window appears as shown in Figure 3-86,
Export templates (local file system) (p. 3-122).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-121
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-86 Export templates (local file system)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse to select a file.


The Select a file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter a filename to export the template.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Start to launch the template export.


The progress and completion of the template export is shown as displayed in Figure 3-87,
Export template: Completed (p. 3-123).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-122
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Exporting templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-87 Export template: Completed

You can save the report related to the template export (XML format).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-123
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Export of workorders
The export of workorders allows you to export workorders in the CM XML format.
To export a workorder, run the following actions:

In the File menu, select Import and export.


The Figure 3-88, Import and Export Wizard: export workorder (p. 3-125) window
appears.
Select the Export workorder option.
Click Next.
The Figure 3-89, Export workorders (local file system) (p. 3-126) window appears.
Click Browse to select a file.
The Figure 3-90, Select a file (p. 3-126) window appears.
Enter a filename to export the snapshots.
The Figure 3-91, Export workorder: Start (p. 3-127) window appears.
Click Start to launch the snapshot export.
The progress and completion of the snapshot export is shown in the Figure 3-92,
Export workorder: Completed (p. 3-128) window.
You can save the report related to the workorder export (XML format).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-124
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-88 Import and Export Wizard: export workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-125
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-89 Export workorders (local file system)

Figure 3-90 Select a file

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-126
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-91 Export workorder: Start

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-127
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Export of workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-92 Export workorder: Completed

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-128
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing key masks


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to import key masks into the WPS.
Note: The import of key masks allows the user to import a key mask file into a
workspace in the CM XML format.
Steps to import key masks

Perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the File menu, select Import and export.


The Import and Export wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Import key masks option as shown in Figure 3-93, Import and Export wizard:
Import key masks (p. 3-130).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-129
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-93 Import and Export wizard: Import key masks

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.
The Import key masks: (Local file system) window appears as shown in Figure 3-94,
Import key masks: (Local file system) (p. 3-131).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-130
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-94 Import key masks: (Local file system)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse.
The Select a CM XML key mask file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the directory and the key mask file to import.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Open.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Start to start the import.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-131
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

You can save the report related to the key mask import (in XML format).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-132
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing reference workorders


Purpose

The purpose of this section is to describe the procedure for importing a reference
workorder in the CM XML format.
For information about creating and exporting a reference workorder, see Managing
reference workorders (p. 4-84).
Steps to import a reference workorder

Perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the File menu, select the Import and export option.
Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Import reference workorder option and click Next.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse and select the workorder to import and click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specify the folder name, under which the reference workorder must be imported. Figure
3-95, Import reference workorder - Specify folder name (p. 3-134) provides an example
for the folder name.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-133
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-95 Import reference workorder - Specify folder name

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To start the import, click Start.


When the import is completed, if the procedure must be tracked, click Save Report....
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To view the workorder, click the Workorder tab and navigate to the appropriate directory
under the Repository folder.
Figure 3-96, Reference Workorder (p. 3-135) shows the location of the reference
workorders imported into the WPS.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-134
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-96 Reference Workorder

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-135
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Import of snapshots
The import of snapshots allows you to import snapshots into a workspace, in the CM
XML format.
To import a snapshot, you must perform the following actions:
1. In the File menu, select Import and export.
The Figure 3-97, Import and export wizard: import snapshot (p. 3-137) window
appears.
2. Select any of the following sources (Figure 3-98, Source (p. 3-137)):
Local file system
Live server repository
3. Click Next.
The Figure 3-99, Import snapshot: mode selection (p. 3-138) window appears.
4. Select any of the following options:
Replace initial snapshot and discard existing workorders

Merge with planned network


Replace initial snapshot and keep existing workorders
Resynchronize the planned configuration with new snapshot
Delete with planned network

5. Click Next.
The Figure 3-100, Import snapshot: file selection (local file system)
(p. 3-139) window appears, if you have selected the local file system.
The Figure 3-101, Import snapshot: file selection (live server repository)
(p. 3-140) window appears, if you have selected the live network repository.
6. Click Browse.
The Figure 3-102, Select a CM XML snapshot (p. 3-141) window appears.
7. Select the directory and the snapshot to import. Click Open.
The Figure 3-103, Import snapshot (snapshot selected) (p. 3-142) appears.
8. Click Next.
The Figure 3-104, Select subset of objects to import (p. 3-143) window appears, to
select a subset of the top-level objects to import.
9. To filter objects a top level, click Edit filter or select an object and click Edit
advanced filter....
The Figure 3-105, Top-Level objects analysis (p. 3-144) window appears.
10. You can select a subset of top-level objects to import.
11. Click Next.
The Figure 3-106, Import snapshot: Start (p. 3-145) window appears.
You can save the workspace.
12. Click Start to start the snapshot import.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-136
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The progress and completion of the import is displayed in the Figure 3-107, Import
snapshot: Completed (p. 3-146) window.
13. You can save the report related to the snapshot import (XML format).
Figure 3-97 Import and export wizard: import snapshot

Figure 3-98 Source

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-137
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-99 Import snapshot: mode selection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-138
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-100 Import snapshot: file selection (local file system)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-139
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-101 Import snapshot: file selection (live server repository)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-140
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-102 Select a CM XML snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-141
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-103 Import snapshot (snapshot selected)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-142
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-104 Select subset of objects to import

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-143
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-105 Top-Level objects analysis

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-144
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-106 Import snapshot: Start

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-145
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-107 Import snapshot: Completed

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-146
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing template masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing template masks


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to import template masks into the WPS.
Note: The import of templates allows you to import template masks into a workspace
in the CM XML format.
Steps to import template masks

Perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the File menu, select Import and export.


Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Import template masks option and click Next.


Result: The Import template masks (Local file system) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse to select the directory and the template to import.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Open.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Start to start the change import.


The progress and completion of the import appears as shown in Figure 3-108, Import
template masks: Completed (p. 3-148).
You can save the report related to the template import (in the XML format).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-147
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing template masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-108 Import template masks: Completed

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-148
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing templates
Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to import templates into the WPS.


The import of templates allows you to import templates into a workspace in the CM XML
format.
Import the following types of templates into the WPS:

RAN templates
RRM templates

PP templates

Steps to import templates

Perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the File menu, select Import and export.


Result: The Import and export window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Import template option and click Next.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-149
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The window for file selection appears as shown in Figure 3-109, Import

templates: file selection (p. 3-150).


Figure 3-109 Import templates: file selection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Open.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.
The template is imported.
The template analysis window appears as shown in Figure 3-110, Template file analysis
(p. 3-151).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-150
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-110 Template file analysis

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Start to start the import.


The progress and completion of the import is displayed as shown in the Figure 3-111,
Import template: Completed (p. 3-152).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-151
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-111 Import template: Completed

You can save the report related to the template import (in the XML format).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-152
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing workorders
Purpose

This procedure describes how to import workorders into WPS using the Import and
Export wizard.
Steps to import workorders into WPS

Perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the File menu, select Import and export.


Result: The Import and export window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Import workorders option.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select any of the following sources:

Local file system


Live server repository

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.

On selecting Local file system as the source, the Import workorders (Local file
system) window appears as shown in Figure 3-112, Import workorders (Local file
system) (p. 3-154)
Click Browse to navigate to the local directory and select the workorder to import.
On selecting the Live server repository, the Import workorders (Live server
repository) window appears as shown in Figure 3-113, Import workorders (Live
server repository) (p. 3-155).
Select the workorder to import from the live server repository as shown in Figure
3-114, Import workorders: workorder selection (p. 3-157).
Note: If the live server repository is not defined, click define repository and specify
the server name, server type, url, username, password and sub-network. For more
information on defining live server repository, see Configuring WPS settings for
network operations (p. 4-9).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-153
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-112 Import workorders (Local file system)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-154
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-113 Import workorders (Live server repository)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-155
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-114 Import workorders: workorder selection (1 of 2)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-156
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Import and export wizard

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-114 Import workorders: workorder selection (2 of 2)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.
The WPS wizard window prompts you to save the workspace.
Save the workspace if required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Start to start the workorder import.


The window displaying the progress and completion status of the import appears.
If required, save the report related to the workorder import in the XML format.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-157
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Report window and progress bar

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Report window and progress bar


Overview
For long data processing, the tool displays a "progress bar". This gives a better view of
the processing progress.
During import and export operations, the progress bar is integrated into the report
window.
Here are examples of such report window and progress bars:
Figure 3-115 Report window example

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-158
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-116 Progress bar example

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-159
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tabular editor capabilities


Overview
The WPS tabular editor is a graphical table component embedded into other graphical
components.
To access to the tabular editor, you must select the Edition tab in the Object editor:
Edition (p. 3-68).
The tabular editor feature offers the following filtering capabilities:

Filtering on cell (p. 3-160)

Filtering from header column (p. 3-164)

Filtering on Combo box value (p. 3-165)

Filtering on cell

To filter on a cell, you must run the following actions:

Select a cell in a table.


Right-click and select any of the following commands from the contextual menu:
Table display (p. 3-161)

Export table as HTML (p. 3-163)

The following figure shows the commands available for filtering a table cell.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-160
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-117 Filtering on cell

Table display

The following commands are available from the Table display command:

Filter on cell value

Set filter

Remove filter

Remove all filters


Sort ascending

Sort descending

Fit width to content

Autoresize table

Filter on cell value


Displays the table filtered on the selected cell value.
A filtering example is shown in the following screenshot.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-161
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-118 Filter on cell value example

The tabular editor with filters have the filtered column headers highlighted in green.
Set filter
Sets a filter in a table.
An example of filter setting is shown in the following screenshot.

Remove filter
Removes a filter set by the user.
Remove all filters
Removes all the filters set by the user.
Sort ascending
Sorts the selected column in ascending order.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-162
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Sort descending
Sorts the selected column in descending order.
Fit width to content
Fits the width of the selected column to its content.
Autoresize table
Resizes the table, according to the content of the columns.
Export table as HTML

Exports the selected table in the HTML format.


The following window appears to define the output HTML file.

An example of HTML output file is shown in the following screenshot.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-163
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-119 Example HTML output

Filtering from header column

The following screenshot gives the commands available when filtering from header
column.
Figure 3-120 Filtering from header column

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-164
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To filter a table from the header column, run the following actions:

Select a header column of the table.

Right-click and select any of the following commands:


Set filter

Remove filter

Remove all filters

Sort ascending

Sort descending

Fit width to content

Autoresize table

Export table as HTML (p. 3-163)

Filtering on Combo box value

WPS offers the possibility to filter the combo box drop down list. It allows the customer
to reduce the number of choice by defining one or several rules.
To filter a combo box drop down list, run the following actions:
Attention: The combo box of interest cannot be selected to set the filter.

Right-click on a combo box.

The following commands are available:


Set list filter (p. 3-166)

Propagate list filter to column (p. 3-166)

Remove list filter (p. 3-166)

Remove all list filters (p. 3-166)

Table display (p. 3-161)

Export table as HTML (p. 3-163)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-165
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-121 Contextual menu on combo box

Set list filter

This commands allows the user to set one or several filter(s), see Set filter for the GUI
related screenshot.
Propagate list filter to column

This command allows the user to propagate the filter defined on a combo box to the
whole column. All the combo box of the column will be filtered.
Remove list filter

This command removes the filter(s) of the current combo box.


Remove all list filters

This command removes the filter(s) of all the combo box in the current column.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-166
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Help
Overview
This section details the help facilities integrated in the WPS tool. The WPS help is
accessible from the Help menu or by pressing F1.
Floating help window

The following button opens the WPS help on a floating window:

The following window appears:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-167
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-122 Floating help window

Help toolbar

The following buttons are available on the toolbar:


Figure 3-123 Help toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-168
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Home (p. 3-169)


Find (p. 3-170)

Back/Forward (p. 3-171)

Help navigation (p. 3-171)

Home

Displays the help home page.


Figure 3-124 Help home page

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-169
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Find

The find function allows the user to search one or several words on the integrated RAN
model.
Figure 3-125 Help find panel

The user can access to a help window about the search functionality by clicking on the
Search Help link.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-170
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-126 Search help

Back/Forward

Navigates from one help page to another one. The user can easily navigate between the
different pages.
Help navigation

Click on Model for BCR to have information on the object types.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-171
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-127 Model for BCR help

Click on an object to know the attributes of this object:


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-172
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface


Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-128 Help screen for an object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
3-173
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Graphical User Interface

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
3-174
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

4 eneral WPS operating


G
procedures

Overview
Purpose

General WPS operating procedures include commonly used procedures for managing the
WPS tool.
Contents
Workspace management

4-5

Creating a new workspace

4-6

Opening a workspace

4-7

Saving a workspace

4-8

Configuring WPS settings for network operations

4-9

Importing network snapshots

4-11

Importing tabular from Excel file

4-20

Creating a sub-network

4-21

Setting a sub-network as active

4-22

Renaming a sub-network

4-23

Removing a sub-network

4-24

Exporting a snapshot

4-25

Data sharing management

4-32

Setting or changing connection parameters

4-33

Creating shared workspace

4-36

Opening shared workspace

4-37

Removing shared workspace

4-38

Synchronizing workspace

4-39

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-1
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refreshing resource synchronization status

4-40

Publishing resource

4-41

Retrieving resource

4-42

Removing shared resource

4-43

Making a local copy

4-44

Delivering workorder for activation

4-45

Templates management

4-46

Setting the default source

4-47

Importing templates

4-48

Creating a template

4-50

Creating template from a network/dataset object

4-51

Adding a child to a template instance

4-52

Removing a template instance

4-53

Duplicating a template

4-54

Migrating a template

4-55

Distilling a template

4-56

Comparing templates

4-57

Updating template

4-58

Setting template as default

4-59

Unsetting a template as default

4-60

Renaming a template

4-61

Deleting a template

4-62

Exporting templates

4-63

External interfaces

4-64

Importing a configuration file

4-65

Exporting a configuration file

4-67

Exporting table

4-69

Workorder management

4-70

Importing workorders

4-71

Importing reference workorders

4-72

Creating a workorder

4-75

Modifying a workorder

4-76

Merging workorders

4-78

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-2
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Finalizing workorders

4-79

Exporting a single workorder

4-81

Exporting multiple workorders

4-82

Managing reference workorders

4-84

Deleting a workorder

4-88

Datasets management

4-89

Creating a new dataset from MOIs

4-90

Creating a new dataset from a current one

4-91

Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information

4-92

Adding MOIs from the network tree

4-94

Adding MOI(s) by conversion

4-95

Removing objects from the network using a Dataset

4-96

Removing MOIs from a Dataset

4-97

Exporting a dataset

4-98

Deleting a Dataset

4-99

Checks management

4-100

Creating a check profile

4-101

Updating a check profile

4-102

Copying a check profile

4-103

Copying check profiles between WPS applications

4-104

Running checks on MOIs

4-105

Running checks on dataset objects

4-106

Re-running a check session

4-107

Running checks on several object instances

4-108

Deleting a check session

4-109

Audit management

4-110

Creating an audit profile

4-111

Updating an audit profile

4-112

Duplicating an audit profile

4-113

Reusing audit profiles between different WPS applications

4-114

Auditing network objects

4-115

Auditing dataset objects

4-116

Re-running an audit session

4-117

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-3
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting an audit session

4-118

Exporting key masks

4-119

Importing key masks

4-125

Network objects (network MOI) management

4-129

Creating a network object

4-130

Duplicating a network object

4-131

Modifying a network object

4-132

Modifying a network object based on a template

4-133

Comparing a network object with a template

4-134

Comparing two object instances

4-135

Comparing attributes for an object

4-136

Exporting a network object

4-137

Deleting a network object

4-138

Change attribute value

4-139

Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab

4-140

Changing an attribute value from the Network tab

4-141

Changing attribute value using a template

4-142

Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same object class

4-143

Help on Object Types

4-144

Browsing a Network Object

4-145

Searching for an Object

4-146

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Workspace management
Overview
Purpose

The WPS workspace is created for network operations and workorder execution.
The workspace file is not compatible between different release versions of the WPS
application. To import snapshots or workorders of a different release version, use the
Import and Export... wizard.
Contents
Creating a new workspace

4-6

Opening a workspace

4-7

Saving a workspace

4-8

Configuring WPS settings for network operations

4-9

Importing network snapshots

4-11

Importing tabular from Excel file

4-20

Creating a sub-network

4-21

Setting a sub-network as active

4-22

Renaming a sub-network

4-23

Removing a sub-network

4-24

Exporting a snapshot

4-25

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-5
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Creating a new workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a new workspace


Purpose

When you create a new workspace, it is empty. It does not contain a Network instance, a
Workorder or a Dataset.
The loaded Templates are stored independently of the current workspace.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, either select File > New workspace, or click the New
workspace icon.
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-6
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Opening a workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Opening a workspace
Purpose

Open a workspace by loading a saved workspace file (<file name>.wps).


Attention: The Workspace file (<file name>.wps) is not compatible between different
releases of the WPS tool. You must therefore import templates, workorders and
snapshots from the appropriate WPS tool release with the Import and Export...
command.
The stored file (<file name>.wps) must be accessible to the WPS.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, either select File > Open, or click the Open icon.
Result: A Select a workspace file to open window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Navigate to the folder storing the required workspace and Open the workspace.
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
Result: The Open window appears with a progress bar. When completed, the current

workspace is set with the opened workspace.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-7
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Saving a workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Saving a workspace
Purpose

You can save a workspace (<file name>.wps) in a number of ways, depending on whether
it is a new workspace, an open workspace or a workspace to be renamed or saved.
Attention: The Workspace file (<file name>.wps) is not compatible between different
releases of the WPS tool. You must therefore export templates, workorders and
snapshots to the other WPS tool release with the Import and Export... command.
The folder where the workspace file (<file name>.wps) is saved is accessible from the
WPS PC.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Depending on how you opened the workspace, three different saving procedures are
possible.
Result: A Select a file for saving the workspace window appears.
If the current workspace is

Then...

A new workspace

From the WPS main window, either select File


> Save, or click the Save icon. Go to Step 2

An open workspace to be renamed

From the WPS main window, select File >


Save as. Go to Step 2

An open workspace

From the WPS main window, either select File


> Save, or click the Save icon.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Navigate to the folder where you want to store the workspace.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Save.
Result: Save window with a progress bar appears.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-8
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Configuring WPS settings for network operations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring WPS settings for network operations


Purpose

This procedure describes how to configure settings such as defining parameters for data
sharing, workorder execution, import and export of network information, template tree
processing, and organizing MOIs in the network and dataset trees.
Procedure overview

This section provides information on the following procedures:

Steps to configure wizard settings (p. 4-9)

Steps to configure automatic grouping of MOIs in the Network and Dataset tree
(p. 4-10)
Steps to define import and export parameters (p. 4-10)

Using the Change settings menu option and the WPS change settings window, the live
server connection parameters can be set and a shared workpsace can be used for data
exchange between the WPS and live server repository.
Steps to configure wizard settings

Perform the following steps to define the workorder creation procedures for the wizard
operations:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select File>Change settings.


Result: The WiPS Settings window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Wizard tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select any of the following values from the Create new workorder when opening
wizard drop-down:

Ask - On selecting this value and launching a wizard operation, WPS prompts you to

create a new workorder.


Always - On selecting this value and launching a wizard operation, WPS
automatically creates a new workorder for the wizard operations.
Never - On selecting this value and launching a wizard operation, WPS does not
create a new workorder for the wizard operations.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-9
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Configuring WPS settings for network operations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps to configure automatic grouping of MOIs in the Network and Dataset tree

Perform the following steps to enable automatic grouping of the MOIs:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select File>Change settings.


Result: The WiPS Settings window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To enable automatic grouping of MOIs for the Network tree, perform the following steps:

Click the Network tree tab.

Select the Auto grouping activation check box.

Specify the threshold value for automatic grouping.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To enable automatic grouping of MOIs for the Dataset tree, perform the following steps:

Click the Dataset tree tab.

Select the Auto grouping activation check box.

Specify the threshold value for automatic grouping.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Steps to define import and export parameters

Perform the following steps to specify import and export parameters:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select File>Change settings.


Result: The WiPS Settings window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Export/Import tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To define the usage of separator in the CSV files for import and export operations, select
an appropriate value from the Separator for CSV files drop-down.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-10
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing network snapshots


Purpose

The purpose of this section is to describe the procedure for importing a snapshot in the
CM XML format through the Import and Export wizard.
Note: WPS supports import of snapshots in the .XML, .XCM, .ZIP and .GZ file
formats.
Steps to import a snapshot

Perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the File menu, select Import and export.


Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Import snapshots option and click Next.


Result: The Import snapshot: mode selection window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select any of the following options:

Replace initial snapshot and discard the existing workorders

Select this option to create a new snapshot view and remove the existing workorders
if any.

Merge with planned network

Select this option to merge a network snapshot with the existing network.
After the import operation is completed, the WPS workspace includes the initial
snapshot, the previous workorders, and the newly added network objects. The base
network configuration is computed with all the workorders.

Replace initial snapshot and keep existing workorders

Select this option to create the initial snapshot view with the existing workorders.
Rebasing a network with priority on workorders recomputes the current network
based on a new initial snapshot, but keeps the existing workorders.

Resynchronize the planned configuration with new snapshot

Select this option to resynchronize a network with a new reference snapshot .


During the network resynchronization, a new workorder is created and the existing
workorders are removed.

Delete with planned network

Select this option to delete a network.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-11
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: The WPS allows modification of the restricted parameters, but generates an
error report. However, Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend the modification of the
standard and restricted parameters.
Figure 3-99, Import snapshot: mode selection (p. 3-138) shows an example for
selecting the mode for the snapshot import.
Figure 4-1 Import snapshot: mode selection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.
Result: The Import snapshot: file selection window appears.

To import the snapshot from the local directory, click Browse local. Browse to the
location where the snapshot is stored, select the snapshot, and click Open.
To import the snapshot from a live server repository, click Browse repository.
Result: The Select CM XML snapshots from repository window appears.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-12
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: If the live server repository is not defined, click define repository and
specify the server name, server type, url, username, password and sub-network.
For more information on defining live server repository mechanism, see
Configuring WPS settings for network operations (p. 4-9).
Select the snapshot from the live server repository and click Open.
Figure 3-100, Import snapshot: file selection (local file system) (p. 3-139) shows
the window for importing snapshots from the local file system.
Figure 4-2 Import snapshot: file selection (local file system)

Figure 4-3, Import snapshot: define repository (p. 4-14) and Figure 4-4, Import
snapshot: file selection (live server repository) (p. 4-15) show the windows for
importing snapshots from the live server repository.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-13
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-3 Import snapshot: define repository

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-14
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-4 Import snapshot: file selection (live server repository)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the sub-network to which you want to import the snapshot.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-15
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The wizard window for selecting a subset of objects to import appears as

shown in Figure 3-104, Select subset of objects to import (p. 3-143).


Figure 4-5 Select objects to import

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Filter the top-level objects to import:

To select a subset of top-level objects to import, click Edit filter. A window


displaying the list of root objects to import appears as shown in Figure 3-105,
Top-Level objects analysis (p. 3-144).
To select a specific top-level object through the advanced filtering option, select the
object and click Edit advanced filter. A window displaying the subset of the selected
object appears as shown in Figure 4-7, Select a specific subset of top-level objects
(p. 4-18).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-16
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-6 Select a subset of top-level objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-17
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-7 Select a specific subset of top-level objects

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the objects to import and click Next.


If required, select the option to save the workspace.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To start the import, click Start.


Result: The window indicating the completion of the import procedure appears as shown
in Figure 3-107, Import snapshot: Completed (p. 3-146).
If required, save the report in the XML format.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-18
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-8 Import snapshot: completed

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-19
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Importing tabular from Excel file

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing tabular from Excel file


Purpose

The purpose of this section is to describe the procedure for importing the tabular format
values from the Excel file.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the File menu, select Import and export option.


Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Import tabular from Excel file option.


Result: The Import tabular from Excel file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse... to navigate to the appropriate folder on your local file system and click
Open.
Result: The complete file path appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To start the import, click Start.


Result: The values of the Excel file are imported.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-20
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Creating a sub-network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a sub-network
Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a sub-network.


Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select FileSet active sub-network...


Result: The Set active sub-network window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Create.
Result: The Create sub-network window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter a name for the sub-network.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-21
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Setting a sub-network as active

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Setting a sub-network as active


Purpose

This procedure describes how to set an existing sub-network as an active sub-network.


Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select FileSet active sub-network...


Result: The Set active sub-network window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the sub-network.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Set as Active.


Result: The selected sub-network is set as an active sub-network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-22
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Renaming a sub-network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Renaming a sub-network
Purpose

This procedure describes how to rename an existing sub-network.


Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select FileSet active sub-network...


Result: The Set active sub-network window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the sub-network.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Rename.
Result: The Rename sub-network window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Rename the sub-network.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-23
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Removing a sub-network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing a sub-network
Purpose

This procedure describes how to remove an existing sub-network.


Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select FileSet active sub-network...


Result: The Set active sub-network window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the sub-network.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Remove.
Result: The sub-network is removed from the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
Result: The Set active sub-networkwindow is closed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-24
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting a snapshot
Purpose

This section describes the procedure for exporting a snapshot in the CM XML format
through the Import and Export wizard.
Note: The Export as CM XML command, available from the contextual menu for the
Network root in the WPS workspace, also allows exporting of snapshots to the local
repository.
Steps to export a snapshot

To export a snapshot, perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the File menu, select Import and export.


Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Export snapshots option and click Next.


Result: The Export snapshot (local file system) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse to select a file.


Result: The Select a directory window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the directory path and type the file name for snapshot. Figure 3-79, Export
snapshot (local file system) (p. 3-112) illustrates the file name and directory path
specification.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-25
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-9 Export snapshot (local file system)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Save as ZIP archive as required


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-26
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The window for filtering objects to export appears as shown in Figure 4-10,

Export snapshot: Edit filter (p. 4-27).


Figure 4-10 Export snapshot: Edit filter

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Filter the top-level objects to import:

To select a subset of top-level objects to export, click Edit filter. A displaying the list
of root objects to export appears as shown in Figure 4-11, Select a subset of top-level
objects (p. 4-28).
To select a specific top-level object through the advanced filtering option, select the
object, and click Edit advanced filter. A window displaying the subset of the selected
object appears as shown in Figure 4-12, Select a specific subset of top-level objects
(p. 4-29).
To select parameterized filter to export subset to objects, click Edit parameterized
filter. A window displaying the list of root objects to export appears as shown in
Figure 4-13, Select a parameterized filter (p. 4-30).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-27
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-11 Select a subset of top-level objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-28
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-12 Select a specific subset of top-level objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-29
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-13 Select a parameterized filter

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the objects to export and click Next.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To start the export, click Start.


Result: The progress and completion of the snapshot export is shown in Figure 3-83,
Export snapshot: Completed (p. 3-116).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-30
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-14 Export snapshot: Completed

If required, save the report in the XML format.


Note: If the sub-networks are defined in WPS, the sub-network name is appended to
the CM XML snapshot file name, for example <Snapshot_filename>-<subnetworkname>.xcm. If no sub-networks are defined in WPS, the default sub-network name is
appended to the file name, for example <Snapshot_filename>-default.xcm.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-31
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data sharing management


Overview
Purpose

The WPS data sharing environment enables several team members to work on common
CM data simultaneously. For more information about this functionality, see the WPS
data sharing (p. 2-47) chapter.
Contents
Setting or changing connection parameters

4-33

Creating shared workspace

4-36

Opening shared workspace

4-37

Removing shared workspace

4-38

Synchronizing workspace

4-39

Refreshing resource synchronization status

4-40

Publishing resource

4-41

Retrieving resource

4-42

Removing shared resource

4-43

Making a local copy

4-44

Delivering workorder for activation

4-45

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-32
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Setting or changing connection parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Setting or changing connection parameters


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to set or change connection parameters to access a


shared workspace on the live server repository.
Before you begin

Authentication parameters are required to log into a shared data repository. Ensure that
the authentication information required for defining connection parameters is available.
Steps to define connection parameters for data exchange

Perform the following steps to define parameters for the live server repository
connections:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select File>Change settings.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-33
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Setting or changing connection parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The WPS change settings window appears as shown in Figure 4-15, WPS

settings window (p. 4-34).


Figure 4-15 WPS settings window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To define connection parameters for data sharing, enter appropriate values in the host,
username, and password fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To connect to the live server repository, click Connect.


Result: The connection to the live server is established.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To add a new connection or another live server repository details, click the Transfer tab
on the WiPS Settings window, and then perform the following steps:
a. Click New connection.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-34
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Setting or changing connection parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Add New Connection window appears.

b. Enter the server name.


c. Select the server type.
d. Enter the IP address of the server or host name in the host1 field.
e. Enter the user name.
f. Click OK.
Result: The Transfer Connection Parameters window appears.

g. Enter the password and click Connect.


Result: The connection to the new live server is established.

Note: You can also define the connection parameters for data exchange with the live
server repository during the import of snapshots or workorders into WPS. If the live
server repository is already configured, the import wizard displays the live server
details, from which the snapshots and workorders can be imported. If the live server
details are not configured or if a new connection must be added, click define
repository and then specify the connection parameter details such as server name,
server type, host IP address, username, and password.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To modify the connection parameters, click the Transfer tab and then perform the
following steps:
a. Ensure that the connection to modify is selected.
b. Click Edit.
Result: The Edit Connection window appears.
c. Modify the parameters as required.
d. Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To remove a connection, perform the following steps:


a. On the Transfer tab, ensure that the connection to delete is selected.
b. Click Remove.
Result: A pop up window asking you to confirm the deletion appears.
c. Click Yes.
Result: The connection to the live server is removed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-35
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Creating shared workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating shared workspace


Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a shared workspace on the repository. It publishes
the currently loaded workspace in the application.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Sharing Create shared workspace from the main menu.


Result: The Create shared Workspace window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the Workspace name field with the name of the shared workspace to be created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Create.
Result: The Create shared workspace <filename> window with a progress bar

appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Save report... to save an HTML log file containing all the modifications.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-36
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Opening shared workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Opening shared workspace


Purpose

This procedure describes how to retrieve locally all the resources of a shared workspace
defined in the repository. The procedure outputs and saves an HTML log file, to track the
messages generated during the retrieval function. See the Data sharing chapter for more
details.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the main menu, click Sharing > Open shared workspace.
Result: The Open shared workspace window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the workspace to be opened.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Open.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes to proceed.


Result: The Open shared workspace '<filename>' window with a progress bar

appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the HTML log file containing all the modifications, click Save report....
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-37
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Removing shared workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing shared workspace


Purpose

This procedure describes how to remove a shared workspace from the repository. One or
several workspaces can be removed by this operation.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the main menu, click Sharing > Delete shared workspace.
Result: The Delete shared workspaces window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select in the list the workspaces to remove.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes to proceed.


Result: A window with a progress bar appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the HTML log file containing all the modifications, click Save report....
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-38
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Synchronizing workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Synchronizing workspace
Purpose

This procedure describes how to synchronize the local workspace with the repository one.
To make the modifications visible by the other team members the current workspace must
be published in the repository. This action updates the version on the server, see Data
sharing for more information.
The synchronization operation publishes and retrieves the data required to synchronize all
the non-conflicting resources. For information on conflict resolution, see Refresh
resource synchronization status (p. 3-39).
Steps to synchronize shared workspace
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the main menu, click Sharing > Synchronize shared workspace or click the
Synchronize shared workspace icon.
Result: A prompt asking you to confirm the synchronization operation appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Confirm by clicking Yes.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the HTML log file containing all the modifications, click Save report....
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-39
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Refreshing resource synchronization status

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refreshing resource synchronization status


Purpose

This procedure describes how to refresh the resource synchronization status. This
operation updates the local view of the resource with the latest view from the server. This
operation is required to achieve the resource retrieval and the shared workspace
synchronization actions.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Sharing Refresh resource synchronization status, from the main menu.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-40
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Publishing resource

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Publishing resource
Purpose

This procedure describes how to declare a new resource in the repository or a new version
of an existing one. This action makes the resource available for other team members. The
operation is disabled when a conflict on the resource is detected.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the main menu, click Sharing > Publish resource.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
Result: The Publish '<resourceName>' window with a progress bar appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the HTML log file containing all the modifications, click Save report....
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-41
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Retrieving resource

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Retrieving resource
This procedure describes how to update the local resource with the latest version of a
shared resource available in the repository. To discard any conflicts between resource
version, make sure to refresh the resource synchronization status.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the resource to retrieve from the Workorders tab (p. 3-50).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Sharing > Retrieve resource, from the main menu.


Result: A Retrieve '<resourceName>' window with a progress bar opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Save report... to save locally a html log file containing all the modifications that
have been done step by step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-42
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Removing shared resource

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing shared resource


Purpose

This procedure describes how to remove a shared resource from the repository.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select a resource from the Workorders tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right-click on the selected resource.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click delete.
Result: The selected resource appears in gray color in the Workorders tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right-click on the selected resource.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Publish (delete resource on repository).


Result: A Publish '<resourceName>' window appears and the selected resource will

be removed from the repository.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Save report... to save locally an HTML log file containing all the modifications.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-43
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Making a local copy

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Making a local copy


Purpose

This procedure describes how to save the shared workspace locally to work offline. All
the resources of the workspace will be managed as local resources. The created file is
saved at .../wips/user/sharing/WorkspaceName/export_from_server_Config.xcm.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open a shared workspace from the repository.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the main menu, click Sharing > Make local copy.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-44
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Data sharing management

Delivering workorder for activation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delivering workorder for activation


Purpose

This procedure describes how to publish a workorder to the WMS.


Steps to deliver workorder for activation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Workorders tab, select the workorder.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the main menu, click Workorders > Export workorder> on live server
repository.
Result: The Export workorder '<workorderName>' (live server repository)

window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify the name of the workorder to be delivered.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-45
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Templates management
Overview
Purpose

A template is a particular kind of object dedicated to the management of values likely to


be shared among several objects. It is used during the instantiation of Managed Objects to
minimize the number of parameters to be manually initialized by the user. See the
Templates (p. 3-19) chapter.
Templates are used when:

creating a network object


running a wizard
comparing network objects

Templates files extension is <filename>.xtpl.


Contents
Setting the default source

4-47

Importing templates

4-48

Creating a template

4-50

Creating template from a network/dataset object

4-51

Adding a child to a template instance

4-52

Removing a template instance

4-53

Duplicating a template

4-54

Migrating a template

4-55

Distilling a template

4-56

Comparing templates

4-57

Updating template

4-58

Setting template as default

4-59

Unsetting a template as default

4-60

Renaming a template

4-61

Deleting a template

4-62

Exporting templates

4-63

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-46
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Setting the default source

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Setting the default source


Purpose

When a template is imported, created, or updated, a source is associated with each


template instance and with each template attribute. This procedure describes how to set
the default source.
Steps to set the default source
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select Templates > Set current source....
Result: The Set current source window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ensure that the appropriate source is selected from the drop down menu and then click
Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-47
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing templates
Purpose

This procedure describes how to import a CM XML template (<file name>.xtpl). To


know more about CM XML, see CM XML Format Description,
(UMT/OMC/DD/007615). Once you have imported the templates, Alcatel-Lucent
recommends that you compare the existing network objects with the imported templates
(See Comparing a network object with a template (p. 4-134)).
The templates file (<file name>.xtpl) to import must be accessible to the WPS.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select Templates tab.


Result: The Templates tree appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select File > Import and Export....
Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Import templates, then click Next >.


Result: The Import templates (Local file system) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse....
Result: The Select a CM XML templates file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Navigate and select the template to import, and then click Open.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next > in the Import templates (Local file system) window.
Result: The Import templates (Local file system) window opens with a progress

bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If all operations have to be analyzed and tracked, click Show report... and then click
Save Report.... Click Start to import.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-48
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Attention: The unsupported model version or unrecognized object type discards the
associated template instance. Check the Template file analysis report for such
instances.
Result: The Import templates (Local file system) window appears with a progress

bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If all operations have to be tracked, click Save Report... in the appropriate folder. Click
Close.
Result: The new template appears in the templates tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-49
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Creating a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a template
Overview

This procedure describes how to create a new template.


Steps to create a template
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, either select Templates >Create template... or in the
Templates tab, select the template subtree object, and then click Create template...
from the contextual menu.
Result: A Create a new template <version/object> window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the Template name.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Object type and then click OK.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-50
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Creating template from a network/dataset object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating template from a network/dataset object


Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a template after defining a network or dataset
object (MOI). The template inherits its model name and version from those of the root
MOI.
The root MOI is part of the current network or dataset.
Steps to create a template from a network or dataset object
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network or Datasets tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Network or Datasets tab, select the element to be used as root, to create the
template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, select Create template....
Result: The Create template window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When the root MOI has child objects, the created template can be a unitary or sub-tree
template.
If the template is...

Then...

A sub-tree template

Select the Capture subtree box.

A unitary template

Clear the Capture subtree box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specify the Template name and then click OK.


Result: The new template appears in the Templates tree under the Templates tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-51
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Adding a child to a template instance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Adding a child to a template instance


Purpose

This procedure describes how to add a child to a template instance.


Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select Templates tab (see Templates tab (p. 3-55)).
Result: The Templates tree appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the templates tree, select the template where the child will be added.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the template editor panel, fill in the Template creation: create field with the
proper <child type>. If applicable, fill in the rdnId and use template fields. Then click
Create.
Result: The child appears in the templates tree window.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-52
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Removing a template instance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing a template instance


Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a template instance.


At least one child must be defined in the template instance.
Steps to remove a template instance
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select Templates tab.


Result: The templates tree is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the templates tree, select the template instance to delete.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, click Delete.
Result: A Confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
Result: The child template instance is removed from the templates tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-53
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Duplicating a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Duplicating a template
Purpose

This procedure describes how to duplicate a template instance. The template inherits its
model name and version from those of the duplicated template.
Steps to duplicate a template instance
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select Templates tab.


Result: The templates tree appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the templates tree, select the template.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Duplicate
template....
Result: The Duplicate template window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the duplicated template has child instances, the copy of the template created during the
duplicate operation can be a unitary or sub-tree template.
If the template is...

Required action

A sub-tree template

Select the Capture subtree check box.

A unitary template

Clear the Capture subtree check box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specify a name for the template in the Template name field, and then click OK.
Result: The new template appears in the templates tree under the Templates tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-54
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Migrating a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Migrating a template
Purpose

This procedure describes how to migrate a template.


Steps to migrate a template
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click the Templates tab.


Result: The templates tree appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the templates tree, select the templates.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Migrate....
Result: The Migrate templates window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Target version, and then click Apply.


Result: The Migrate templates from 'source version' to 'target version' window

appears with a progress bar.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the report, click Save Report....


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close
Result: The new template appears in the templates tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-55
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Distilling a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Distilling a template
Purpose

This procedure describes how to distill templates.


Note: To minimize template file size, the template attribute set to a default object
model value can be discarded.
Steps to distill a template
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select Templates tab.


Result: The templates tree appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the templates tree, select the templates to be distilled.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Distill....
Result: The Distill templates window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Purge empty templates and then click Yes.


Result: The Distill templates window opens with a progress bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the report, click Save Report....


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-56
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Comparing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Comparing templates
This procedure describes how to compare two different templates and propagate attribute
value to each other.
The two templates to compare must have different attribute values.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select Templates tab. (See Templates tab (p. 3-55)).
Result: The Templates tree appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Templates tree, select the first template to be compared and then the second one
(Ctrl+ click).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, click Compare... the template.
Result: The Compare 'template1' with 'template2' window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate arrow to propagate attribute value from one template to the other.
Repeat it for other attributes to be updated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Apply changes.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-57
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Updating template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Updating template
Purpose

This procedure describes how to update template.


Steps to update a template
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click the Templates tab.


Result: The templates tree is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the templates tree, select the templates to be updated.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Template panel, select the attributes to update.


To...

Steps

Set the attribute value

Specify the value and click Set.

Reset the attribute value

Click Unset.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Repeat the step for each attribute.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-58
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Setting template as default

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Setting template as default


Purpose

This procedure describes how to set a template as a default.


Steps to set a template as default
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click Templates tab.


Result: The templates tree appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the templates tree, select the template to set as default.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Set template as
default.
Result: The selected template in the templates tree is updated with the (default) word

at the end.
To remove the default setting, select the template and click Do not use template as
default from the contextual menu or the Templates menu.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-59
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Unsetting a template as default

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unsetting a template as default


Purpose

This procedure describes how to unset a template as default.


Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select Templates tab (see Templates tab (p. 3-55)).
Result: The Templates tree appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the templates tree, select the template that is set as default.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, select Do not use
template as default (see Templates menu in the main window).
Result: The string (default) is removed from the template name.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-60
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Renaming a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Renaming a template
Purpose

This procedure describes how to rename a template.


Steps to rename a template
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click the Templates tab.


Result: The templates tree appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Templates tree, select the template to be renamed.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, select Rename....
Result: The Rename template window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specify the new name and then click OK.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-61
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Deleting a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a template
Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a template.


Attention: Deleting the children of a sub-tree template changes the sub-tree template
to a unitary template.
Steps to delete a template
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select Templates tab.


Result: The templates tree appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Templates tree, select the template to delete.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, click Delete the template.
Result: A Confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
Result: The template is removed from Templates tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-62
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Templates management

Exporting templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting templates
Purpose

This procedure describes how to export templates to a storage directory.


For exporting all the templates, other alternatives exist:

Using Export all templates... from Templates root tree contextual menu.

Using FileImport and Export... from the WPS main window.

The directory storing the templates must be accessible to the WPS tool PC.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Templates tab.


Result: The Templates tree appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the templates tree, select the templates to export.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, select Export template....
Result: The Select template sources window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the templates sources to be exported, and then click OK.


Result: The Select an output file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select a folder, enter template name, and then click Save.


Result: The Export Templates as CM XML window appears with a progress bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Start.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When completed, if the operation must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-63
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

External interfaces
Overview
Purpose

The WPS tool can manage XML interfaces.


To know more about CM XML files, see WPS external interfaces (p. 2-43) section.
Configuration files (XML) must be accessible to the WPS tool PC.
Contents
Importing a configuration file

4-65

Exporting a configuration file

4-67

Exporting table

4-69

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-64
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


External interfaces

Importing a configuration file

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing a configuration file


Purpose

This procedure describes how to import a configuration file and replace the initial
snapshot with new network snapshot.
When the initial snapshot is replaced by the new snapshot, all workorders associated with
the initial snapshot are discarded from the current workspace.
Customer type parameters

You can modify only the parameters that are standard or restricted for a specific network.
WPS ignores the manufacturer parameters during the import, but generates an error report
after the import is completed.
Attention: Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend the modification of restricted
parameters.
Before you begin

Before you begin, perform the following checks

Open any <filename>.xcm with an XML editor and note the name of the Main Server.
For example, Cluster id="UMAINSERV1". Ensure that the name of the Main Server
displayed in WPS is the same as the Main Server mentioned in the CM XML file.
From the WPS main window, select the Network tab and check if the Cluster/Name
of the Main Server is the same as the Cluster id in the <file name>.xcm file.

Procedure

To import the snapshot, perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, perform any of the following actions:

From the WPS main window, select File Import and Export....

From the Workorders tab, select the Workspace object, and then select Import and
Export... from the contextual menu.
Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Import snapshots, and then click Next.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Replace initial snapshot and discard existing workorders, and then click Next.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-65
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


External interfaces

Importing a configuration file

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the snapshot to import, either from the local directory or a live server repository:

Click Browse local to navigate to the local directory and select the snapshot.

Click Browse repository to navigate to the live repository and select the snapshot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select a sub-network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To select a subset of top-level objects, click Edit filter.


To select a specific subset of a top-level object, click Edit advanced filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the objects to import and click Next.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Yes or No as appropriate, and then click Start.


Result: The Import snapshots - Replace initial snapshot and discard existing
workorders window appears with a progress bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Click Save Report... to save the report and then click Close.
Result: The new Initial snapshot: <filename>.xcm appears in the Workspace tree

and the old workorders are replaced.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-66
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


External interfaces

Exporting a configuration file

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting a configuration file


Purpose

This procedure describes how to export a configuration file (network snapshot) in the
XML format.
Note: The format of the exported <file name>.xcm file is similar to the format used
for imports.
Procedure

Perform the following steps to export the configuration file.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, perform any of the following actions:

Select File > Import and Export....

From the Workorders tab, select the Workspace object, and then select Import and
Export... from the contextual menu.
Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

Note: You can also use the Export as CM XML contextual menu command, which is
available on selecting the network root in the Workspace tab, to export a network
snapshot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Export snapshot, and then click Next .


Result: The Export snapshot (Local file system) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse....
Result: The Select a directory window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate local repository, and then click Save.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the file name for the snapshot to be exported.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Save as ZIP archive as required.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-67
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


External interfaces

Exporting a configuration file

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The wizard window for filtering network objects appears.

If required, perform the following steps:

To select a subset of top-level objects to export, click Edit filter and select the
objects.
To select a specific subset of a top-level object, click Edit advanced filter and select
the object.
To select parameterized filter to export subset to objects, click Edit parameterized
filter and select the object.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Start.
Result: The Export snapshot (Local file system) window appears with a progress

bar.
If ...

Then...

The selected file is new

A Export snapshot (Local file system)


windows appears with a progress bar.

The selected file already exists

The File already exists warning window


appears.
Click Yes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

After the snapshot is exported successfully, click Save Report... to save the report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-68
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


External interfaces

Exporting table

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting table
Purpose

This procedure describes how to export the tabular data in the HTML or Excel format.
This procedure applies to the tabular data displayed on clicking the WPS Instance
Browser tabs such as Network, Workorders, Templates, Datasets or Checks.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click any tab, for example Network, Workorders or
Templates, in the WPS Instance Browser.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right-click the table display panel, and select Export table....


Result: The Select an output file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the file name, choose the file type, and click Save.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-69
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Workorder management
Overview
Purpose

A workorder defines the offline configuration changes between the initial configuration to
the current one. After the workorder is exported, it is used online by the network manager
to update the network.
Alcatel-Lucent recommends splitting a major network transition plan into as many
workorders as possible within WPS. The WPS tool does not support the undo function.
To recover a previous working workspace state, delete the last workorder.
To know more about workorder, see the Workorders (p. 3-15) chapter.
Workorder extension file is <filename>.xwo.
Workorder files (<filename>.xwo) must be accessible to the WPS tool PC.
Contents
Importing workorders

4-71

Importing reference workorders

4-72

Creating a workorder

4-75

Modifying a workorder

4-76

Merging workorders

4-78

Finalizing workorders

4-79

Exporting a single workorder

4-81

Exporting multiple workorders

4-82

Managing reference workorders

4-84

Deleting a workorder

4-88

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-70
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing workorders
Purpose

This procedure describes how to import workorders in XML format. While importing
workorders, you can keep the existing workorders.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select File > Import and Export....
Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Import workorders, select the source, and then click Next.
Result:

If Local file system is selected, the Import workorders (Local file system)
window appears.
Click Browse... to navigate to the appropriate folder, select the workorder<file
name>.xwo, and click Open.
If Live server repository is selected, the Import workorders (Live server
repository) window appears.
Select the workorder to import, from the Live server repository.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If required, save the workspace, and then click Start.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When completed, if the procedure must be tracked, click Save Report.... .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
Result: The imported workorders are listed in the Workorders tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-71
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing reference workorders


Purpose

This procedure describes how to import a reference workorder.


Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select File ->Import and Export....
Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Import reference workorder as shown in the following figure:


Figure 4-16 Import reference workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-72
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Import workorders (Local file system) window appears.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse... to navigate to the appropriate folder on your local file system and click
Open.
Result: The complete file path appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next >.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Save the current workspace if required and then click Start.


Result: The Import workorders (Local file system) window appears with a progress

bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When the import is completed, if the procedure must be tracked, click Save Report....
Click Close.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-73
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The imported reference workorder appears in the Repository tree on the
Workorders tab as shown in the following figure:
Figure 4-17 Reference Workorder

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-74
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Creating a workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a workorder
Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a workorder.


From the contextual menu, the command Insert a new workorder before can be used
for creating a new workorder above the selected one.
Steps to create a workorder
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Workorders root from the tree.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Workorders menu, click Create new
workorder....
Result: A workorder indicated as new workorder (current) is added at the end of the
Workorders sub-tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specify the required details in the Name, Originator, External reference, External
Description, and Description fields, and then click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-75
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Modifying a workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modifying a workorder
Purpose

This procedure describes how to modify (inhibit/disinhibit) attribute value changes that
belong to a workorder. This procedure includes synchronization of the current network
with the current workorders. Nevertheless, the operator can modify a workorder without
impacting the current network.
The workorder to modify must be part of the workspace.
Steps to modify a workorder
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the workorder to modify from the Workorders tree.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Workorders menu, click Set workorder as
current.
Result: The Setting current workorder window appears with a progress bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the report, click Save Report....


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If required, change the attribute values for the network elements using the operational
procedures or from the Object Editor: Edition panel. After the modifications, go to the
Workorders tab and select the current workorder.
Result: The current Workorder is updated with the attribute value changes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Change panel, select the network object changes to modify. If needed, from the
Inhibit change panel, select the attribute changes to modify.
Use Caps+click or Ctrl+click for multiple objects or attributes selection.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-76
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Modifying a workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Workorders menu, inhibit or disinhibit
changes using the following commands:

Inhibit network change

Disinhibit network change

Disinhibit changes for subtree

Clear inhibition tags

Inhibit changes for subtree

Result: The Workorders tree root appears in red color followed by the word
(misaligned).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Once you performed all the modifications needed, click Recompute planning view from
the Workorders menu.
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Click Yes.
Result: The Recompute planning view window appears with a progress bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

To save the report, click Save Report....


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Click Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Check the current network. Repeat the steps until the workorder is modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-77
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Merging workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Merging workorders
This procedure describes how to merge consecutive workorders into a new one.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab (See Workorders tab
(p. 3-50)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select several consecutive Workorders in the tree by using the Shift/Ctrl key.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or the Workorders menu (See Workorders menu in the
main window), select Merge workorders....
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select an option and then click Run.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When completed, if all operations must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-78
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Finalizing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Finalizing workorders
This procedure describes how to finalize a workorder before activating the change to the
live network.
Attention: Alcatel-Lucent recommends that all workorders are merged in one
workorder prior to exporting them onto live network elements. Once you have
exported a simple workorder, the exported workorder might contain inconsistent (or
unset) attribute values for a live network element.
The workorders must be in the workspace.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab (See Workorders tab
(p. 3-50)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Workorders tree root.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or the Workorders menu (See Workorders menu in the
main window), select Purge inhibited changes.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Workorders menu (See Workorders menu in the main window) click
Recompute planning view.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
Result: The Recompute network window appears with a progress bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When completed, if all operations must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or the Workorders menu (See Workorders menu in the
main window), select Merge network changes.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-79
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Finalizing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Merge network changes window appears.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate saving option, and then click Run.


Result: A Merge network changes window appears with a progress bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

When completed, if all operations must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.
Result: All the workorders including the current one are replaced by the merged

workorder.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-80
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Exporting a single workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting a single workorder


This procedure describes how to export a workorder.
Attention: Alcatel-Lucent recommends using this procedure. When exporting a single
workorder in a CM XML format, the WPS application creates a <file
name>_reverse.xwo workorder file. If the activation of the workorder leads to a
problem in the live network, the reverse workorder allows to set the network back to
its initial state

NOTICE
Inconsistent (or unset) attribute value(s)
Alcatel-Lucent recommends that all workorders are merged in one workorder prior to
exporting them onto live network elements. Once you have exported a simple workorder,
the exported workorder might contain inconsistent (or unset) attribute values for a live
network element.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab (See Workorders tab
(p. 3-50)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Workorder to export from the Workorders sub-tree.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or the Workorders menu (See Workorders menu in the
main window), select Export workorder....
Result: The Select a file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Navigate to the appropriate folder where the workorder will be stored (.xwo), enter the
File name and then click Save.
Result: An Export workorder... window appears with a progress bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When completed, if all operations must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-81
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Exporting multiple workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting multiple workorders


Purpose

This procedure describes how to export workorders in the CM XML format as an xwo
file.
Note: Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you export only a single workorder at a time.
When exporting a single workorder, the WPS application generates a reverse
workorder file. When the activation of a workorder leads to a configuration error in
the live network, you can use the reverse workorder to troubleshoot, or to set the
network back to its initial state.
Before you begin

Before you begin, perform the following checks:

WPS checks are run and errors, if any, are resolved.


If the workorder must be exported to a live server repository, ensure that all relevant
workorders are merged into single workorder.

Steps to export multiple workorders


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click the Workorders tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the workorder from the Workorders sub-tree and select any of the following
options from the contextual menu:
Select any of the following options:

Click Export all workorders...>on local file system


Result: The Select an output directory window appears.
Click Export all workorders...>on live server repository
Result: The Export workorders (live server repository) window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specify the output directory.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the name of the workorder in the Filename dialog box.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-82
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Exporting multiple workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The workorders from WPS are exported as single CM XML (xwo format) file

to the directories specified during the export operation.


Note: If the sub-networks are defined in WPS, the sub-network name is appended to
the workorder file name, for example, <workorder_filename>-<subnetwork-name>.
xwo. If there are no sub-networks defined in WPS, the default sub-network name is
appended to the workorder file name, for example, <workorder_filename>-default.
xwo.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-83
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Managing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Managing reference workorders


Purpose

This procedure describes how to create, generate, and export reference workorders.
Workorder cloning operations

On creating a reference workorder, WPS automatically generates the mask associated


with the reference workorder. This mask is used to create the bulk input file on running
workorder cloning mask file operation. On clicking the node tree, the content of the bulk
mask appears in the right panel.
Using Import and Export wizard to import reference workorder

For information on importing a reference workorder through the Import and Export
wizard, see Importing reference workorders (p. 3-133).
Procedure overview

This section describes how to perform following procedures:

Creating a reference workorder

Exporting a reference workorder

Generating workorders

Applying changes to network

Renaming a reference workorder

Deleting a reference workorder

Steps to create a reference workorder


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Workorder, which you want to set as a reference.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Workorders main menu, click Set as a
reference workorder.
Result: A pop-up window asking you to confirm the folder name appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the folder name and click OK.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-84
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Managing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The selected workorder appears under the Repository folder of the
Workorder tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Steps to export reference workorder files


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To export the reference files, either from the contextual menu or from the Workorders->
Repository menu, select reference workorder folder.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To export only the bulk mask file, right-click on the mask file or the reference workorder
folder, and select Create workorder cloning mask file from the contextual menu.
Result: The Select an output file window that allows you to navigate to your local

file system appears.


a. Specify a name for the file.
b. Click Save.
The output is saved in the .xls format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To export the workorder, right-click on the reference workorder and select Export
workorder.
Result: The Select an output file window that allows you to navigate to your local

file system appears.


a. Select the directory to export the workorder.
b. Specify the file name for the workorder.
Result: The workorder is saved as a CM XML file in the specified location.
Note: The reference workorder can be exported only to the local file system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To export both mask file and reference workorder, right-click on the reference workorder
folder and select Export reference files from the contextual menu.
Result: The reference files are exported to your local file system.

The reference workorder is exported as CM XML file and the bulk mask is exported
as .xls file.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-85
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Managing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The bulk input file contains the following columns:

Type

Object
Method
Attribute

Reference value
Value
Note: All columns must be filled with appropriate values before importing a bulk file
into WPS.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Steps to generate workorders


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right-click on the reference workorder or the reference workorder folder, and select
Generate workorder(s) from the contextual menu.
Result: The Import bulk file and generate workorders window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the bulk file in the .xls format.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next
Result: The bulk file content is imported into WPS and a session is created under the
reference workorder folder in the Workorders tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Steps to apply changes to network


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right-click on the session created after importing the workorders mask file and select
Apply session to network or right-click on the workorder generated after importing the
bulk file, and select Apply workorder(s) to network.
Result: A report indicating the warnings and errors are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify the report and click Close.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-86
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Managing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The changes stored in the workorder are applied to the network.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Steps to rename a reference workorder


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To rename the workorder, select the workorder and click Rename either from the
contextual menu or from the Workorders-> Repository menu.
Result: A pop-up window to rename the folder appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the name of the workorder you want to rename.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Steps to delete a reference workorder


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To delete the reference workorder, select the workorder and click Delete either from the
contextual menu or from the Workorders-> Repository menu.
Result: A pop-up window asking you to confirm deletion appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes to delete the workorder.


Result: The workorder is deleted from the workorders tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-87
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Workorder management

Deleting a workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a workorder
Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a workorder.


Attention: Deleting a workorder affects the workorder commands.
Steps to delete a workorder
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click the Workorders tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Workorders tree, select the workorder to delete.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, click Delete.
Result: A Confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the report, click Save Report....


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
Result: The workorder is removed from Workorders tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-88
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Datasets management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Datasets management
Overview
Purpose

Instead of performing the same modification on several similar objects, Datasets can be
defined as lists of MOI that are going to be modified in the same way at the same time.
The WPS tool provides the opportunity to create lists of objects, which can be
manipulated together all at one go, once they have been grouped in a Dataset.
To know more about Datasets, see the Datasets (p. 3-29) chapter.
Contents
Creating a new dataset from MOIs

4-90

Creating a new dataset from a current one

4-91

Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information

4-92

Adding MOIs from the network tree

4-94

Adding MOI(s) by conversion

4-95

Removing objects from the network using a Dataset

4-96

Removing MOIs from a Dataset

4-97

Exporting a dataset

4-98

Deleting a Dataset

4-99

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-89
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Datasets management

Creating a new dataset from MOIs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a new dataset from MOIs


Purpose

This procedure creates a Dataset from one or several MOIs.


Before you begin

Ensure that at least one MOI exists in the current workspace.


Steps to create a new dataset from MOIs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the network objects to be part of the dataset from the Network tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, click Add to Dataset > new
Dataset....
Result: A Create dataset window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the Dataset name field and then click OK.


Result: The dataset appears with the selected MOIs in the Datasets tree of the
Datasets tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-90
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Datasets management

Creating a new dataset from a current one

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a new dataset from a current one


Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a Dataset from an existing Dataset by converting
it according to a predefined set of rules.
The dataset to be converted must be defined in the current workspace.
Steps a new dataset from the current one
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the dataset object to be converted from the Datasets tree.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Dataset conversion panel, select Input type, Navigators, Output type and
Output dataset, and then click Apply .
Result: The Convert... window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the report, click Save Report....


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close
Result: The dataset is updated in the Datasets tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-91
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Datasets management

Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information


Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a dataset for hardware inventory information.
Hardware inventory information in WPS

You can import the hardware inventory information into WPS from the WMS live server.
The hardware inventory information contains the read-only attributes, the modification of
which is restricted in WPS.
Before you begin

Before you begin, ensure that the hardware inventory information is imported into WPS
successfully.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Network tree, select the hardware objects for which you want to create a
dataset.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, select Create inventory
dataset.
Result: The Create inventory dataset window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the dataset name, and then click OK.


Result: The Add nodes to inventory dataset 'Dataset name' window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the report, click Save Report....


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-92
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Datasets management

Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The dataset appears with the selected objects in the Datasets tree of the

Datasets tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To group the dataset nodes automatically, right-click and select Group by Type from the
contextual menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To export dataset nodes as CM XML, select Export as CM XML from either the contextual
menu or the Datasets menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To export dataset nodes in the CSV format, select Export as CSV from either the
contextual menu or the Datasets menu.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-93
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Datasets management

Adding MOIs from the network tree

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Adding MOIs from the network tree


Purpose

This procedure describes how to add one or several MOIs to a Dataset.


Before you begin

Ensure that the Dataset and the MOIs are defined in the current workspace.
Steps to add MOIs from the network tree
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Network tree, select the network objects to be added to the dataset.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, click Add to Dataset >
dataset name.
Result: The MOIs appear under the dataset sub-tree under the Datasets tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-94
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Datasets management

Adding MOI(s) by conversion

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Adding MOI(s) by conversion


Purpose

This procedure describes how to add MOIs to a Dataset from an existing Dataset by
converting it according to a predefined set of rules.
The dataset to be converted is defined in the current workspace.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab. (See Datasets tab (p. 3-58)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the dataset object to be converted from the Datasets tree.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Dataset conversion panel (See Dataset conversion panel (p. 3-86)), select
Input type, Navigators, Output type, Output dataset, and then click Apply.
While converting a New... dataset file, fill in the Dataset name in the Dataset creation
window prior to applying the conversion.
Result: A Converting... window with a progress bar appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When completed, if the procedure must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.
Result: The new MOI appears in the Datasets tree under the appended dataset.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-95
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Datasets management

Removing objects from the network using a Dataset

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing objects from the network using a Dataset


Purpose

This procedure removes all the objects included in a Dataset from the current Network.
Steps to remove objects from the network
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Datasets tree, select the dataset object that contains the objects to delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, select the Remove all
objects from network command.
Result: A Confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
Result: All the objects are removed from the Dataset andNetwork.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-96
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Datasets management

Removing MOIs from a Dataset

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing MOIs from a Dataset


Purpose

This procedure describes how to remove one or several MOIs from a Dataset.
Steps to remove MOIs from a dataset
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Datasets tree, select the objects to be removed from the dataset.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, click Remove from
Dataset.
Result: A Confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
Result: The selected objects are removed from the dataset sub-tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-97
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Datasets management

Exporting a dataset

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting a dataset
Purpose

This procedure describes how to export a dataset in the CM XML format. The exported
dataset in the CM XML can later be imported into WPS as a snapshot.
Before you begin

The dataset to export must be available and defined in the current workspace.
Procedure

To export a dataset, perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the dataset object to export from the Datasets tree.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, select Export as CM XML.

To export only the dataset instance, select Dataset instances only...

To export the dataset instances with the subtrees, select Dataset instances with their
subtrees....
Result: The Select an output file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the file name and click Save.


Result: A window with a progress bar to indicate the status of the export procedure
appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Save Report... to save the report.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-98
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Datasets management

Deleting a Dataset

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a Dataset
Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a Dataset.


Before you begin

Ensure that the Dataset to delete is available in the current Workspace.


Steps to delete a dataset
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click the Datasets tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Datasets tree, select the dataset to delete.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, click Delete.
Result: A Confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
Result: The selected dataset is removed from the Datasets tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-99
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Checks management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Checks management
Overview
Purpose

The WPS tool allows running checks on network objects or datasets to ensure consistency
in the current network configuration data.
The WPS provides several sets of checks, which can be launched together or separately,
on the MOIs from the Network or the Datasets tab. The subsets of checks can be
customized and run as Check profiles on the selected MOIs.
Alcatel-Lucent recommends the following for WPS checks:

Run checks before exporting the workorders to the live server repository for
activation.
Exercise caution while modifying or resolving check errors with the AutoFix option.

Contents
Creating a check profile

4-101

Updating a check profile

4-102

Copying a check profile

4-103

Copying check profiles between WPS applications

4-104

Running checks on MOIs

4-105

Running checks on dataset objects

4-106

Re-running a check session

4-107

Running checks on several object instances

4-108

Deleting a check session

4-109

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-100
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Checks management

Creating a check profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a check profile


Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a check profile to run checks.


Steps to create a check profile
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Checks tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Checks menu, select Create check profile.


Result: A Create profile window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specify the check profile name in the Profile name field, and then click OK.
Result: The check profile appears in the Check profiles tree of the Checks tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To enable or disable checks, check or uncheck the Enable check box respectively.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To allow automatic resolution of check errors for a specific check entry, select the Autofix
check box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the check profiles, select Save all profiles from the Checks menu, or right-click
on the check profile and select Save all profiles from the contextual menu.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-101
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Checks management

Updating a check profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Updating a check profile


Purpose

This procedure describes how to update an existing check profile.


Steps to update a check profile
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Checks tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Check profiles tree, select the profile to update.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To enable or disable checks, check or uncheck the Enable check box respectively.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To allow automatic resolution of check errors for a specific check entry, select the Autofix
check box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the check profiles, select Save all profiles from the Checks menu, or right-click
on the check profile and select Save all profiles from the contextual menu.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-102
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Checks management

Copying a check profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Copying a check profile


Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a check profile from an existing profile.
Steps to copy a check profile
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Checks tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Check profiles tree, select the profile to be copied.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Duplicate... either from the Checks menu or from the contextual menu.
Result: A Duplicate check profile window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specify a new name for the profile and then click OK.
Result: The check profile appears in the Check profiles tree of the Checks tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If required, modify the check profile.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the check profiles, select Save all profiles from the Checks menu, or right-click
on the check profile and select Save all profiles from the contextual menu.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-103
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Checks management

Copying check profiles between WPS applications

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Copying check profiles between WPS applications


Purpose

This procedure describes how to copy check profiles between different WPS applications.
Before you begin

Perform the following checks:

The WPS application instance containing the check profile to copy is active and
running.
The WPS instance to which the check profile must be copied is not running.

Steps to copy check profiles between WPS applications


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Explorer window, navigate to the directory where the originating WPS
application is installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open the <user-data-dir>/<WPS-version>/data/user/checkProfiles folder and copy the


check profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Explorer window, navigate to the directory where the other WPS application
instance is installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open the <user-data-dir>/<WPS-version>/data/user/checkProfiles folder and paste the


copied check profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Start the WPS application instance, to which the check profile is copied.
Result: The WPS application loads the copied check profile and displays it in the
Check profiles tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-104
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Checks management

Running checks on MOIs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Running checks on MOIs


Purpose

This procedure describes how to run checks on one or several MOIs in the Network.
On selecting the network root, the checks available for a network are displayed.
Before you begin

Ensure that the network on which the checks to be run is defined and the MOIs are
available in current WPS workspace.
Steps to run checks on MOIs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the elements to check.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu, or from the Checks menu, or from the tool bar, select
Run checks....
Result: The Checks window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate check profile. Select the Enabled check boxes for the
corresponding check entries that you want to run. To allow automatic resolution, select
the AutoFix check box.
Note: Alcatel-Lucent recommends you to exercise caution while performing this
procedure, as there is no undo option available for parameter modifications.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
Result: A Checking selected objects ... window with a progress bar appears. The
check session appears in the Checks tab, under the Checks sessions sub-tree with the

date and time.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the report, click Save Report....


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-105
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Checks management

Running checks on dataset objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Running checks on dataset objects


Purpose

This procedure describes how to run checks on one or several MOIs from the Dataset.
Steps to run checks on the dataset objects
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the datasets tree, select the elements to check.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Checks menu, or from the tool bar, select
Run checks....
Result: The Checks window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate profile and select the Enabled check box corresponding to the
check entries. To enable automatic resolution, select the AutoFix check box.
Alcatel-Lucent recommends that exercising caution while using the AutoFix option.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
Result: The Checking selected objects window with a progress bar appears. The
check session appears in the Checks tab, under the Checks sessions sub-tree with the

date and time.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the report, click Save Report.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-106
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Checks management

Re-running a check session

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-running a check session


Purpose

This procedure describes how to re-run a check session.


Before you begin

Ensure that the check session to re-run is available in the WPS workspace.
Steps to re-run a check session
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Checks tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Check sessions sub-tree, select the Check session to re-run.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Checks menu, or from the Check session
panel, select Re-run check session.
Result: The Re-run check session window displaying the new check errors, if any,

appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the report, click Save Report.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-107
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Checks management

Running checks on several object instances

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Running checks on several object instances


Purpose

This procedure describes how to run checks on several object instances for a common
error or warning, and group such instances in a Dataset.
For information on modifying the dataset attributes, see the following procedures:

Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab (p. 4-140)


Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same object class (p. 4-143)

Steps to run checks on several object instances


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select Checks tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Check sessions sub-tree, select the check session to run.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Check sessions panel, sort the checks by Check ID, Object, or Attribute.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the checks by using Shift or Ctrl key+left arrow or mouse click.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the contextual menu, select Add selected objects to dataset>new dataset or Add
shown objects to dataset>new dataset for all checks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specify a name for the dataset and click OK.


Result: The Add nodes to dataset <dataset-name> window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the report, click Save Report.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-108
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Checks management

Deleting a check session

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a check session


Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a check session.


Before you begin

Ensure that the check session to delete is available in WPS workspace.


Steps to delete a check session
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Checks tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Perform following actions as required.


Action

Steps

To delete all check sessions

a. Select Delete all check sessions either from the Check


sessions sub-tree or from the Checks menu.
b. Go to Step 3.

To delete single check session.

a. Select the session, and then click Delete either from the
contextual menu or from the tool bar.
b. Go to Step 3.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To confirm deletion, click Yes.


Result: The check session is removed from the Check sessions sub-tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-109
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Audit management
Overview
Purpose

This section describes how to use the WPS audit feature.


The audit feature in the WPS provides automates the data comparisons between several
MOIs.
Contents
Creating an audit profile

4-111

Updating an audit profile

4-112

Duplicating an audit profile

4-113

Reusing audit profiles between different WPS applications

4-114

Auditing network objects

4-115

Auditing dataset objects

4-116

Re-running an audit session

4-117

Deleting an audit session

4-118

Exporting key masks

4-119

Importing key masks

4-125

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-110
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Creating an audit profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating an audit profile


Purpose

This procedure describes how to create an audit profile.


Steps to create an audit profile
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS network tree, select one or several MOIs for which you want to create an
audit profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Audits menu, click Audit, or right-click the MOIs and then select Audit from
the context menu.
Result: The Audit window displaying the MOIs and a list associated templates

appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To create a new audit profile, click Create.


Result: An audit profile is created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To apply the profile to the audit session, click Apply.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To run the audit session, click OK.


Result: The audit profile is added under the Audit profiles list in the Audit tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-111
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Updating an audit profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Updating an audit profile


Purpose

This procedure describes how to update an existing audit profile for auditing the MOIs.
Steps to update an audit profile
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Audit tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Audit profiles tree, select the profile to update.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To select a template, perform any of the following steps:

Select the Included check box.

Select the template row, right-click the Audit Profile, and then select the Include
command from the context menu.
To select all objects, select the template row, right-click the Audit Profile, and then
select the Include all command from the context menu.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To remove a template from the profile, perform any of the following steps:

Select the Exclude model values check box.

Select the template row, right-click the Audit Profile, and then select the Exclude
command from the context menu.
To remove all the templates, select the template row, right-click the Audit Profile, and
then select the Enclude all command from the context menu.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To save the changes, click Save all profiles from the Audit menu.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-112
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Duplicating an audit profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Duplicating an audit profile


Purpose

This procedure describes how to duplicate an existing audit profile and rename it.
Steps to duplicate an audit profile
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Audit tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Audit profiles tree, select the profile to duplicate.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Audit menu or from the right-click menu, click Duplicate....
Result: A pop window to specify a name for the audit profile appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter a name for the audit profile, and then click OK.
Result: The audit profile appears under the Audit profiles tree of the Audit tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To update the audit profile, follow the steps described in the Updating an audit profile
(p. 4-112) procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-113
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Reusing audit profiles between different WPS applications

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reusing audit profiles between different WPS applications


Purpose

This procedure describes how to reuse audit profiles between two different WPS
application instances.
Before you begin

Before you begin, perform the following checks:

The originating WPS application, containing the audit profile to copy is active.
The destination WPS application is not running.

Steps to copy audit profiles


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Explorer window, navigate to the place where the originating WPS application
is installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open the <WPS-User-home-dir>/data/user/audit/auditProfiles and copy the audit profile


XML file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Explorer window, navigate to the place where the destination WPS application
is installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open the <WPS-User-home-dir>/data/user/audit/auditProfiles folder, then paste the


copied audit profile file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Start the destination WPS application, then select the Audit tab.
Result: The copied audit profile is loaded by the WPS and listed under the Audit
profiles tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-114
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Auditing network objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Auditing network objects


Purpose

This procedure describes how to audit one or several MOIs from the Network.
Before you begin

Before you begin, ensure that the MOIs to audit are available in WPS network tree.
Steps to audit network objects
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the MOIs to audit.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Audit menu, or from the toolbar, click
Audit....
Result: The Audit window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select an audit profile.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the MOI and the associated templates or the template masks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select any of the following options to specify a report type.

HTML Report Type


XLS Report Type
HTML and XLS reports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
Result: The audit session appears under the Audit sessions of theAudit tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-115
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Auditing dataset objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Auditing dataset objects


Purpose

This procedure describes how to audit one or several MOIs from the Dataset.
Steps to audit dataset objects
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Datasets tree, select the objects to audit.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the contextual menu or from the Audit menu, or from the toolbar, click Audit....
Result: The Audit window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select an audit profile.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the MOI and the associated templates or the template masks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select any of the following options to specify a report type.

HTML Report Type


XLS Report Type
HTML and XLS reports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
Result: The audit session appears under the Audit sessions of the Audit tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-116
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Re-running an audit session

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-running an audit session


Purpose

This procedure describes how to re-run an audit session.


Before you begin

Ensure that the Audit sessions are defined in the current workspace.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Audit tab.


Result: The Audits tree is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Audit sessions sub-tree, select the Audit session to be rerun.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right-click the desired Audit session to display the context-sensitive functions menu and
select Re-run audit session. You can also select the Re-run audit session menu
command either from the Audits menu or from the Audit session pane.
Result: A Re-run audit session window with a progress bar is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the audit operations must be tracked, click Save audit session....


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-117
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Deleting an audit session

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting an audit session


Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete an audit session.


Before you begin

Before you begin, ensure that the audit session to delete is available in the WPS.
Steps to delete an audit session
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Audit tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To delete a single audit session, select the audit session from the Audit session sub-tree,
and then click Delete from the right-click menu.
Result: A pop up window asking you to confirm deletion appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To delete several audit sessions, select the Audit sessions sub-tree, from the Audit menu,
click Delete all audit sessions.
Result: A pop up window asking you to confirm the deletion appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes.
Result: The audit sessions are removed from the Audit sessions sub-tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-118
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting key masks


Purpose

This procedure describes how to export the key masks.


Note: The export of key masks allows the user to export key filter defined in the
Audit tab in the CM XML format.
Steps to export key masks

Perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the File menu, select Import and export.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-119
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Import and export wizard: export key masks window appears as

shown in Figure 3-73, Import and export wizard: export key masks (p. 3-105).
Figure 4-18 Import and export wizard: export key masks

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Export key masks option.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-120
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Export key masks (local file system) window appears as shown in

Figure 3-74, Export key masks (local file system) (p. 3-106).
Figure 4-19 Export key masks (local file system)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse to select a file.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-121
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Select a file window appears as shown in Figure 3-75, Select a file

(p. 3-107).
Figure 4-20 Select a file

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter a filename to export the key masks.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-122
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Export key masks : Start window appears as shown in Figure 3-76,

Export key masks : Start (p. 3-108).


Figure 4-21 Export key masks : Start

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Start to launch the key masks export.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-123
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The progress and completion of the key masks export is displayed as shown in

Figure 3-77, Export key masks: Completed (p. 3-109).


Figure 4-22 Export key masks: Completed

You can save the report related to the key masks export (XML format).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-124
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing key masks


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to import key masks into the WPS.
Note: The import of key masks allows the user to import a key mask file into a
workspace in the CM XML format.
Steps to import key masks

Perform the following steps:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the File menu, select Import and export.


The Import and Export wizard window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Import key masks option as shown in Figure 3-93, Import and Export wizard:
Import key masks (p. 3-130).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-125
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-23 Import and Export wizard: Import key masks

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Next.
The Import key masks: (Local file system) window appears as shown in Figure 3-94,
Import key masks: (Local file system) (p. 3-131).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-126
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-24 Import key masks: (Local file system)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Browse.
The Select a CM XML key mask file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the directory and the key mask file to import.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Open.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Start to start the import.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-127
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Audit management

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

You can save the report related to the key mask import (in XML format).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-128
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Network objects (network MOI) management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network objects (network MOI) management


Overview
Purpose

Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend using the following network object management
procedures for normal operating procedures (if not clearly stated) as wizards are available
for this purpose. Nevertheless the network objects management procedures might be
necessary for exemption operational procedures.
Contents
Creating a network object

4-130

Duplicating a network object

4-131

Modifying a network object

4-132

Modifying a network object based on a template

4-133

Comparing a network object with a template

4-134

Comparing two object instances

4-135

Comparing attributes for an object

4-136

Exporting a network object

4-137

Deleting a network object

4-138

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-129
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Network objects (network MOI) management

Creating a network object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a network object


Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a new MOI.


Prior to this procedure, Alcatel-Lucent recommends setting the proper default template in
order to minimize the MOI customizing (See Setting template as default (p. 4-59)). If
you have not set a template as default, the new MOI is created with the default values of
the model.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab (see Network tab (p. 3-48)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select an element where a MOI has to be added.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Object editor: Edition (p. 3-68), select the appropriate MO to be created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fill in the requested parameter value (the user label or the MO ID) and select the template
model to be applied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Create button.


Result: The new MOI appears under the selected network element.

Note:

While creating a small cell object, you must specify a value for either longitude or
latitude. If no value is specified for longitude or latitude parameter, the small cell
object will not be created under FemtoNetwork.
While creating a small cell group, you must specify a name for the Small Cell
Group. The relevant attribute for Small Cell Group name is groupname. This helps
in identifying the Small Cell group with the group name for sorting purpose.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-130
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Network objects (network MOI) management

Duplicating a network object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Duplicating a network object


Purpose

This procedure describes how to duplicate an MOI.


Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the element to duplicate and copy it either by clicking
Edit>Copy or by right-clicking and selecting Copy from the contextual menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select a parent object to which you want to add the copied MOI
and paste the MOI either by clicking Edit>Paste or by right-clicking and selecting Paste
from the contextual menu.
Result: The Paste window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ensure that the appropriate user label is specified for the MOI and click OK.
Result: The duplicated MOI appears under the selected network element.

Note: To paste the copied MOI several times, select the Keep window open for
pasting several times check box and click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-131
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Network objects (network MOI) management

Modifying a network object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modifying a network object


Purpose

This procedure describes how to modify an MOI.


Steps to modify a network object
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the network object (MOI) to modify.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Perform any of the following steps:

To modify the network object manually, perform the following steps:


a. From the Object editor: Edition panel, select the parameter Attribute value
(Value column) to modify.
b. Specify the attribute values and click Set. Repeat the steps for each attribute.
To modify the network object using a template, perform the following steps:
a. Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Propagate
template....
Result: The Propagate template... window appears.
b. Choose a template for the Available templates field.
c. Select the check box in the Apply column where the template parameter value must

be applied. Repeat the steps for each parameter.


d. Click Apply changes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-132
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Network objects (network MOI) management

Modifying a network object based on a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modifying a network object based on a template


Purpose

Instead of modifying an MOI parameter after parameter, this procedure describes how to
modify it based on a template.
The template is defined in the current workspace.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab (See Network tab (p. 3-48)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the network object (MOI) to modify.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, select Propagate
template.... (See Templates menu in the main window).
Result: The Propagate template... window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Choose a template among the Available templates field.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the check box in the Apply column where the template parameter value is to be
applied. Repeat for each parameter to be set according to the template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Apply changes.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-133
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Network objects (network MOI) management

Comparing a network object with a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Comparing a network object with a template


Purpose

This procedure describes how to compare and modify a network object based on a
template.
Note: Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you to run this procedure each time you want
to create, update, or import a template.
The template must defined in the current workspace
Before you begin

Ensure that the template is available in current workspace.


Steps to compare network objects using a template
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the network object (MOI) to be compared and modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Compare with
template....
Result: The Compare 'object/instance' with template window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select a template from the list of Available templates.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate arrow to update value of either the object attribute or the template
attribute. Repeat the steps for each attribute.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Apply changes.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-134
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Network objects (network MOI) management

Comparing two object instances

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Comparing two object instances


Purpose

Some components in the network must be set up in the same way as the reference
component. This procedure describes how to compare two different object instances.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab (See Network tab (p. 3-48)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the reference network object instance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, double-click (Ctrl+left click) the network object instance to audit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, select Compare...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate arrow to update value of either the audited object attribute or the
reference object attribute. Repeat it for each attribute to be updated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Apply changes.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-135
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Network objects (network MOI) management

Comparing attributes for an object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Comparing attributes for an object


Purpose

This procedure describes how to compare attributes for an object.


The components in the network must set in the same way on every node. Comparing
attributes for an object is necessary to ensure that the network components are
synchronized.
Steps to compare attributes for a type of object
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the network object to be audited.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Object Editor: Edition panel, select the by type display option. All the related
objects to be audited are displayed with their attribute values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If necessary sort or filter the attribute.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-136
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Network objects (network MOI) management

Exporting a network object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting a network object


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to export a managed network object (MOI) in the CM
XML format.
Before you begin

Ensure that the MOI to export is available and defined in the current network.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the element to export.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the contextual menu, select Export as CM XML....


Result: The Select an output directory window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the directory.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the file name, and then click OK.


Result: The Export as CM XML... window appears with a progress bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

After the export is completed, click Save Report... to save the report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-137
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Network objects (network MOI) management

Deleting a network object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a network object


Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a MOI.


Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab (See Network tab (p. 3-48)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the network object (MOI) to delete and then click the
Delete icon.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK to confirm the deletion.


Note: When deleting an FGW object from the network, ensure that the FGW is not set
as a reference object for the associatedFGWs attribute under SCATCA MOI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-138
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Change attribute value

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change attribute value


Overview
Purpose

Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend using the following attributes value change
procedures for normal operating procedures (unless clearly stated) as wizards are
available for this purpose. Nevertheless, the attributes value change procedures may be
necessary for exemption operational procedures or for some parameters that need to be
changed on a bit amount of objects all being part of the class of objects (MOC).
These procedures must be performed by the expert users who know the model well.
Contents
Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab

4-140

Changing an attribute value from the Network tab

4-141

Changing attribute value using a template

4-142

Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same object class

4-143

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-139
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Change attribute value

Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab


Purpose

This procedure describes how to change an attribute value using the object editor from the
Datasets tab.
Before you begin

Prior to starting procedure, the object tree path for the attribute must be identified.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab (See Datasets tab (p. 3-58)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the object where the attribute value has to be changed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Object editor: Edition panel, select the attribute (See Object editor: Edition
(p. 3-68)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the new value in the attribute details part. Modify the attributes and then click Set.
To unset the values, click Unset. For some attributes, Description and Browse options
are available.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-140
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Change attribute value

Changing an attribute value from the Network tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Changing an attribute value from the Network tab


Purpose

This procedure describes how to change an attribute value by using the Object editor:
Edition panel from the Network tab.
Before you begin

Ensure that the object tree path for the attribute is identified
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the object under which the attribute value must be changed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Object Editor: Edition panel, select the attribute.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the new value in the attribute details or modify them, and then click Set. To unset a
value, click Unset.
For some attributes, Description or Browse and link options are available.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-141
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Change attribute value

Changing attribute value using a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Changing attribute value using a template


Purpose

This procedure describes how to change attribute values by propagating template


attributes.
Before you begin

Ensure that the template is loaded and available in the WPS workspace.
Steps to change the attribute values using a template
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the object for which the attribute values must be changed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, select the Propagate
template....
Result: The Propagate template window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select a template among the Available templates field.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the check boxes for attributes to be modified. To propagate template values, click
Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Apply changes.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-142
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Change attribute value

Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same


object class

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same


object class
Purpose

This procedure describes how to change part of or all attributes values belonging to the
instances of an object.
This procedure is applicable for the Network tab and the Datasets tab.
Before you begin

Ensure that the object tree path for the attributes is identified.
Steps to change attribute values in bulk
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network or Datasets tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the object under which the attributes values must be
modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Object Editor: Edition panel, select the By type display.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the table display panel, select the attributes to set.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modify the attribute values and then click Set.


To unset a value, click Unset.
For some attributes, the Description or Browse and link options are available.
Repeat the steps for other attributes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-143
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Help on Object Types

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Help on Object Types


Overview
Purpose

WPS help is integrated with an UMTS Domain browser which navigates through the
model to get help in configuring network objects. It provides the following topics:

Description of components and attributes.


Navigation facility, based on component hierarchy or links.
Parameter and component search facility.

See the Help (p. 3-41) chapter for more details.


Contents
Browsing a Network Object

4-145

Searching for an Object

4-146

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-144
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Help on Object Types

Browsing a Network Object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Browsing a Network Object


Purpose

This procedure describes how to get help in configuring a network element with the
object browser.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Help > Help, from the WPS main window.


Result: A Help on Object Types window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Domain UMTS Link.


Result: The available Network objects appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on object to get information.


Result: Attributes and children information appear.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
4-145
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

General WPS operating procedures


Help on Object Types

Searching for an Object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Searching for an Object


Purpose

This procedure describes how to retrieve an object to get information about its
configuration.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select Help > Help.


Result: A Help on Object Types window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Find icon at the top of the window.


Result: The Find field appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the name of the object to be searched for.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Press the Enter key.


Result: The list of objects matching the search criterion appears.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
4-146
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

S5mall Cells network


configuration operational
procedures

Overview
Purpose

The Small Cells network configuration operational procedures describe the commonly
used procedures for managing a network with the WPS tool.
Contents
BSRProfile Migration

5-3

Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release

5-4

Migrating a BSRProfile inter-release

5-6

Configuring FGW with WPS

5-7

WPS support of ATCA based FGW

5-8

Configuring FGW data in WPS

5-10

Generating FGW CLI file in WPS

5-11

Configuring IPC with WPS

5-12

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

5-13

Customizing IPC data with WPS

5-19

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS

5-21

Copying configuration data from another IPC

5-24

Configuring locationProfile with WPS

5-28

Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network

5-29

Configuring LocationProfile for a location (region)

5-31

Configuring LocationProfile for a Small Cell group

5-32

Reparenting Small Cells

5-33

Reparenting a Small Cell

5-34

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-1
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk

5-37

Configuring Call Trace on NEs

5-40

Activating Call Trace sessions on FGW

5-41

Activating Call Trace sessions on IPC

5-43

Activating Call Trace sessions on a small cell

5-45

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-2
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


BSRProfile Migration

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BSRProfile Migration
Overview
Purpose

This section describes the procedures to migrate a BSRProfile in an inter-release or


intra-release scenario.
Note: FAL.Plugin.AutoCreateUpdate.HigherVersionProfile is set to true by
default and WPS user is not expected to provision a higher version profile.
Contents
Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release

5-4

Migrating a BSRProfile inter-release

5-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-3
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


BSRProfile Migration

Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release


Purpose

This procedure describes an intra-release migration of a BSRProfile. It provides


information on migrating a BCR (x) Phase (N) BSRProfile to a BCR (x) Phase (N+y)
BSRProfile.
Related information

The BCR(x) Phase (N+y) BSRProfile template is loaded by default in the template tab of
WPS.
Before you begin

Alcatel-Lucent recommends to migrate each profile in separated workorders. After an


upgrade in BCR (x) Phase (N+y), the BSRProfile to migrate are in BCR (x) Phase (N).
A network snapshot must be loaded.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create an empty workorder.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Network tree, select the BSRProfile to migrate.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Create a template from the contextual menu.


Result: The Create template window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter a name for the template and select Capture Subtree, and then click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Templates tab, right-click on the template just created and select Migrate...
from the contextual menu.
Result: The Migrate templates window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Apply.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


BSRProfile Migration

Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Migrate templates from 'N' to 'N+y' window opens. The migrated

template appears under the 'N+y' subtree.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select both the default 'N+y' template and the Migrated template from the templates
tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right-click and from the contextual menu, select Compare...


Result: The Compare window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the differences to propagate from the default BCRx Phase 'N+y' BSRProfile to the
Migrated BSRProfile and then click Apply changes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

From the Network tree, select the Profile object of interest.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

From the Object editor: Edition panel, select a BSRProfile object and select the resulting
template, and then click Create.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

The workorder containing the BSRProfile migration is ready for use.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-5
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


BSRProfile Migration

Migrating a BSRProfile inter-release

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Migrating a BSRProfile inter-release


Purpose

This procedure describes an inter-release migration of a BSRProfile. It provides


information on migrating a BCR (x) Phase (N) BSRProfile to a BCR (y) Phase (N)
BSRProfile.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From WPS (x) version, select all BSRProfile of interest in the network tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right-click and select Export as CM XML... from the contextual menu.


Result: The Select an output file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the location to where you want to export the file and enter a name for the file.
Click Save.
Result: The specified file is generated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create a new workorder .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Import the CM XML file exported earlier. While importing select the merge with
planned network option.
Note: The workorder can be exported. In case of different BSRProfile versions, see
Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release (p. 5-4).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-6
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring FGW with WPS

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring FGW with WPS


Overview
Purpose

This section describes how to import the FGW bulk CM files into WPS and generate
batch files.
The following figure illustrates the FGW configuration procedure.
Figure 5-1 Import FGW configuration

Contents
WPS support of ATCA based FGW

5-8

Configuring FGW data in WPS

5-10

Generating FGW CLI file in WPS

5-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-7
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring FGW with WPS

WPS support of ATCA based FGW

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WPS support of ATCA based FGW


ATCA based FGW

The WPS supports configuration operations for the FGW hosted on SUN servers and also
imported through OAMPreconfig.xml file.
The ATCA based FGW data can be imported in the bulk CM file format and modified in
WPS.
For the ATCA based FGW configuration, the following managed object instances are
available in WPS:

Bladehardware
BSG
FGWoffloadFilter

AAA
BVG
BPG

ItfFgw
FGWbsrSNOffloadArray
IuCS

IuPS
Iuh
Server hardware

The following figure shows the MOIs available for the ATCA based FGW configuration:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-8
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring FGW with WPS

WPS support of ATCA based FGW

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-2 ATCA based FGW MOIs

For more information on attributes and parameter values, press the F1 key or see
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management Small Cells - Parameter Reference Guide
FGW parameters , NN-20500-153P2.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-9
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring FGW with WPS

Configuring FGW data in WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring FGW data in WPS


Purpose

Use this procedure to modify the FGW configuration data through the WPS.
Before you begin

Before you begin, ensure that:

The bulk CM files with FGW configuration data is available on your local directory.
For information on how to generate the FGW bulk CM configuration file, see
Alcatel-Lucent 9365 BSR Signaling Gateway - Operations, Administration,
Maintenance, and Provisioning, 401-387-028.
The supported MIM version of FGW object is available in the WPS network tree.

The required FGW object instances are created in WPS.

To import the bulk CM file

Follow these steps to import the FGW configuration file into WPS:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the FGW object in the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS operations workspace, click Import bulkcm file.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the FGW configuration file from your local directory.


Result: The mediated data from the configuration files will be loaded in WPS and the
initial snapshot is replaced in the Network tab.

Note: It is recommended to run the WPS checks after importing the bulk CM files.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modify the FGW configuration data in WPS by adding or deleting objects and modifying
attribute values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Run WPS checks on the current workorder and make the required changes to pass the
check.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-10
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring FGW with WPS

Generating FGW CLI file in WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generating FGW CLI file in WPS


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to generate the FGW CLI script file with FGW data
configured in WPS.
Before you begin

To carry out this procedure successfully, ensure that the FGW configuration parameters
are set in WPS.
To generate FGW CLI batch file
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the FGW object from the WPS tree view and click Generate CLI batch file from
WPS operations workspace.
Note: This feature is available only in FGW MIM V3.0 or later versions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the destination directory to store the file.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To generate reversed CLI batch file, select the Generate reversed CLI file check box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
Result: WPS generates the CLI script file.
Reference: For information on loading the updated FGW configuration CLI batch

file, see Alcatel-Lucent 9365 BSR Signaling Gateway - Operations, Administration,


Maintenance, and Provisioning, 401-387-028.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-11
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring IPC with WPS


Overview
Purpose

This section describes how to configure IPC with WPS.


The WPS is enhanced with following features to support IPC configuration:

WPS toolset
This includes tabular editor, CM XML import and export options, and features such as
workorder synchronization, template management, and checks.
IPC CLI script generation
This feature provides a mechanism to perform bulk operation on IPC data and thus
minimizes the server impacts to the end user.
Load IPC Snapshot
This feature provides a mechanism to import a db_walk.dump IPC snapshot into
WPS.

Contents
Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

5-13

Customizing IPC data with WPS

5-19

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS

5-21

Copying configuration data from another IPC

5-24

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-12
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to generate the db_walk.dump file at IPC.


The db_walk.dump can be imported into WPS as described in the following procedure
and used for configuring IPC from WPS.
To generate db_walk.dump file
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check if OAMLMTGwServer is running by executing the following command:


rnccheckservers

Result: If the server is running, the following output will be displayed.


AVAIL OAMLMTGwServer.1

OAMLMTGwCapsule

fms02 ACT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Log on to IPC FMSblade of the OAMLMTGwServer server.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Go to the /flx/RNCinitdb/current/bin directory .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To generate the db_walk.dump file, run the datablitz_meosDump.ksh script.


Result: The db_walk.dump file will be generated in the /flx/RNCinitdb/current/bin

directory.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Save the db_walk.dump file to your local directory.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Example:

The following example shows the content of a sample db_walk.dump file.


Trying to connect to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051
Connected to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051
Parsing line 1
Walking the mo Ipc.Top
*** Mo definition not found Ipc.Top
Parsing line 2
Walking the mo Ipc.EquipmentHolder
*** Mo definition not found Ipc.EquipmentHolder
Parsing line 3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-13
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Walking the mo Ipc.ForcedManagedResource


*** Mo definition not found Ipc.ForcedManagedResource
Parsing line 4
Walking the mo Ipc.UnForcedManagedResource
*** Mo definition not found Ipc.UnForcedManagedResource
Parsing line 5
Walking the mo Ipc.ManagedResource
*** Mo definition not found Ipc.ManagedResource
Trying to connect to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051
Connected to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051
Parsing line 1
Walking the mo Ipc.IPCEquipment
Ipc.IPCEquipment is empty
===============================================
Parsing line 2
Walking the mo Ipc.AuditEntity
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=1)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=1, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="RSM_
SCRAMBLING_CODE_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="BSC-RSM",
UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,
DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMScheduler.0.Integer.RSCAuditCommComponent.0.", Unsig
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=2)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=2, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="DOWNLINK_
CHANNELISATION_TREE_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="BSC-DLCH",
UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,
DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMScheduler.0.Integer.DCTAuditCommComponent.0.", Unsig
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=3)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=3, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REMOTE_
VIEW_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RemoteView", UnsignedInteger
lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName
scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMScheduler.0.Integer.RemoteViewAuditCommComponent.0."
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=4)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=4, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="OAM_DATA_
AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="OAMData", UnsignedInteger
lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName
scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMDataAudit.0.Integer.OAMDataAuditCommComponent.0.", U
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=5)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-14
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],


Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=5, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REFRESH_
STATE_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RefreshState",
UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=1197385673, RunStatus runStatus=
NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshStateAudCommComponent.0."
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=6)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=6, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REFRESH_
FAULT_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RefreshFault",
UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,
DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshFaultAudCommComponent.0."
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=7)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=7, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REFRESH_
INVENTORY_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RefreshInventory",
UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,
DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshInventoryAudCommComponent
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=8)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=8, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REFRESH_
DEPENDENCY_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RefreshDependency",
UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,
DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshDependencyAudCommComponen
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=9)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=9, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REFRESH_
DEGRADEDGROUP_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName=
"RefreshDegradedGroup", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus
runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshDegradedGroupAudCommCompo
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=10)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=10, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE,
BooleanType enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString
entityDescription="REFRESH_FAILUREGROUP_AUDIT", DisplayString
entityName="RefreshFailureGroup", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0,
RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshFailureGroupAudCommCompon
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=11)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-15
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],


Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=11, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE,
BooleanType enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString
entityDescription="SUEG_EMERGENCY_CALL_COUNT_AUDIT", DisplayString
entityName="SUEGEmergencyCallCount", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=
0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName
scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMScheduler.0.Integer.SUEGECAuditCommComponent.0.", Un
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=12)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=12, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCTRUE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="EXECUTE_
DEFERRED_RECOVERY_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName=
"ExecuteDeferredRecovery", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0,
RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.DeferredRecoveryAudCommComponent.0.
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=13)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=13, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCTRUE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="RECOVERY_
MONITOR_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RecoveryMonitor",
UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,
DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RecoveryMonitorAudCommComponent.0."
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=14)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=14, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCTRUE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="UE_
CONTEXT_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="UEContext",
UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,
DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMDataAudit.0.Integer.UEContextAudCommComponent.0.", U
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=15)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=15, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCTRUE, BooleanType
enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="NODEB_
CELL_CONTEXT_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="NodeBCellContext",
UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,
DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMDataAudit.0.Integer.NodeBCellContextAudCommComponent
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=16)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=16, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE,
BooleanType enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString
entityDescription="REDUNDANT_STATE_SYNC_AUDIT", DisplayString
entityName="RedundantStateSync", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0,
RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RedundantStateSyncAudCommComponent.
Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=17)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-16
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],


Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=
[], Integer id=17, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE,
BooleanType enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString
entityDescription="DB_REPLICATION_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName=
"DBReplication", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus
runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=
"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMDataAudit.0.Integer.DBReplicationAuditCommCompone
===============================================
Parsing line 3
Walking the mo Ipc.BearerQOS
Dn: (LIPC=1, BearerQOS=10)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="Voice (5.9 AMR) - high delay
sensitivity (150 ms)", Sequence sparesBool=[], Sequence sparesInt=[],
Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=[], Integer id=1,
UnsignedInteger aAl2QOSIndicator=10, UnsignedInteger
guaranteedBackwardRate=0, UnsignedInteger guaranteedForwardRate=0,
InterfaceType interfaceType=IUCS, UnsignedInteger
maximumBackwardRate=18, UnsignedInteger maximumForwardRate=18,
UnsignedInteger serviceRateDL=12200, UnsignedInteger serviceRateUL=
12200, ServiceType serviceType=STNOTAPPLICABLE, TrafficClass
trafficClass=CONV
Dn: (LIPC=1, BearerQOS=20)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="Voice (4.75 AMR) - high delay
sensitivity (150 ms)", Sequence sparesBool=[], Sequence sparesInt=[],
Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=[], Integer id=1,
UnsignedInteger aAl2QOSIndicator=20, UnsignedInteger
guaranteedBackwardRate=0, UnsignedInteger guaranteedForwardRate=0,
InterfaceType interfaceType=IUCS, UnsignedInteger
maximumBackwardRate=79, UnsignedInteger maximumForwardRate=79,
UnsignedInteger serviceRateDL=64000, UnsignedInteger serviceRateUL=
64000, ServiceType serviceType=STNOTAPPLICABLE, TrafficClass
trafficClass=CONV
===============================================
Parsing line 4
Walking the mo Ipc.OAMPrivate
Dn: (LIPC=1, OAMPrivate=1)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="OAMPrivate", Sequence sparesBool=
[], Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence
sparesString=[], Integer id=1
===============================================
Parsing line 5
Walking the mo Ipc.SuMgr
Dn: (LIPC=1, SuMgr=1)
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],
Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence
sparesString=[], Integer id=1, BooleanType abortFlag=RNCFALSE,
SuRequestData requestData={"", "", "", "", INVALIDSWTYPE,
SUACTIONNOTDEFINED, INVALIDSURELEASETYPE, RNCFALSE, RNCFALSE, "",
RNCFALSE, RNCFALSE, RNCFALSE, SUFWUPGRADE}, SuClusterState
suClusterState=GRACTIVATECOMPLETE, SuCommitResult
suCommitActionStatus=SUCOMMITUNDEFINED, SuDeleteResult
suDeleteActionStatus=SUDELETEUNDEFINED, SuFWUpdateResult
suFWUpdateActionStatus=SUFWUPDATEUNDEFINED, SuGetPkgInfoResult
suGetPkgInfoStatus=SUGETPKGINFOUNDEFINED, SuGetVersionsResult
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-17
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

suGetVersionsStatus=SUGETVERSIONSUNDEFINED, BooleanType
suInfoSyncFlag=RNCTRUE, SuPrecheckResult suPrecheckActionResult=
SUPRECHECKUNDEFINEDRESULT, SuPrecheckAction suPrecheckActionType=
SUPRECHECKUNDEFINEDACTION, UnsignedInteger suProgressIndicatorNumber=
0, DisplayString suProgressIndicatorString="", DisplayString
suTPUCurrentSwVersion="", SoftwareStates suTPUState=CHECKCOMPLETE
===============================================

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-18
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Customizing IPC data with WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Customizing IPC data with WPS


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to perform initial configuration of IPC and define values
for the Managed Object (MO) attributes.
Before you begin

The following prerequisites must be met to carry out this procedure successfully:

IPC is set with Day1 data (delivered as part of the IPC software).
The Day1 data is available on the local directory as the db_walk.dump file.

For more information on db_walk.dump file generation, see Generating db_walk dump
file at IPC (p. 5-13).
To customize IPC data

Follow these steps to customize MO attributes of IPC.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, click the Network tab and then click Edition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Object creation:create drop-down, select IPC and specify the user label for
the object. Click Create.
Result: The IPC object will be created and added to the workspace.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To customize IPC object attributes, select IPC from the WPS tree view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the object type LIPC and the instance, and then click Create.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To import the db_walk.dump file content, click Load IPC Snapshot file.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-19
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Customizing IPC data with WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Load IPC snapshot file option, when executed by importing the

db_walk.dump file, replaces the initial snapshot, keeps all current workorders, creates
a new delta workorder and a new empty workorder for WPS to record the
configuration updates.
Note:

The delta workorder created during the process contains the Day1 data already
present in the IPC, therefore it cannot be translated into an executable CLI script.
The configuration changes done after the Day1 data import are recorded in the
empty workorder, which can be translated into an executable CLI.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update the IPC configuration data by adding or deleting objects, and modifying
parameters.
Note: You must define parameters for the mandatory objects such as IuPS and IuCS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Run WPS checks on the current workorder and make the required changes to pass the
check.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-20
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS


Before you begin

Ensure that the IPC is configured by loading the IPC snapshot file into WPS.
For more information on loading the IPC snapshot file, see Customizing IPC data with
WPS (p. 5-19).
To generate IPC CLI file
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the LIPC object instance from the WPS tree view and click Generate IPC CLI file
and reverse using current workorder.
Result: The current workorder is exported in the IPC CLI format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Browse your local directory and select the location to which you want save the CLI script.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To import the IPC configuration data stored in the IPC CLI script, execute the following
commands on the IPC:
/flx/RNCinitdb/current/bin/meosCli
/flx/RNCinitdb/versions/TEST
Result: The configuration data exported from WPS is transferred to the IPC.
Example:
.20090430.191418.sdcteam_ipcutils_b2.2_BSR_IPC_02.02.01.03_
xb6407e74/bin/LIPC.cli
Trying to connect to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051
Connected to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051
Could not load EditLine library. Using simple stdin.
MofCli> set (LIPC=1,IuPS=1)\
userLabel="ALUniv"
set (LIPC=1,IuPSIP=1)\
userLabel="ALUniv"
set (LIPC=1,SNMP=1)\
userLabel="SNMP"

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-21
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

set (LIPC=1,SS7Stack=1,PeerIPSP=1)\
userLabel="ALUniv"
set (LIPC=1,SS7Stack=1,PeerIPSP=2)\
userLabel="ALUniv"
set (LIPC=1,SS7Stack=1,SS7LinkSet=1)\
userLabel="ALUniv"
set (LIPC=1,SS7Stack=1,SS7LinkSet=2)\
userLabel="ALUniv"
set (LIPC=1,SS7Stack=1,SS7StackInst=0)\
userLabel="ALUniv"
>MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed
object server
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"
MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed
object server
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"
MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed
object server
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="SNMP"
MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed
object server
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"
MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed
object server
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"
MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed
object server
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"
MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed
object server
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"
MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed
object server
Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"

Note: If a read-write attribute is updated in WPS, LIPC must be reset to load the
configuration with the updated value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-22
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify if the database is updated with configuration changes. Check the connectivity to all
FMS servers by executing the following command:
rnccheckservers
Result:
Configuration Manager active on fms01
STATE SERVER
CAPSULE
NODE TYPE
=======================================================AVAIL
LogMgrInstance.1 OAMLogMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMAlarmMgr.2
OAMAlarmMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMBUMgr.1
OAMBUMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMDataAuditServer.1OAMDataAuditServerCapsulefms ACT
AVAIL OAMEATranslator.1 OAMEATranslatorCapsulefms01 ACT
AVAIL OAMFMSTranslator.1OAMFMSTranslatorCapsulefms01ACT
AVAIL OAMInterfaceRAgent.1OAMInterfaceRCapsulefms02ACT
AVAIL OAMLMTGwServer.1 OAMLMTGwCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMMEOServer.1
OAMMEOServerCapsule
fms01 ACT
AVAIL OAMOAMSchedulerServer.1 OAMOAMSchedulerServerCapsule fms01 ACT
AVAIL OAMOFManager.1
OAMOFManagerCapsule
fms01 ACT
AVAIL OAMPMServer.1
OAMPerfMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMShelfTranslator.1OAMShelfTranslatorCapsulfms0 ACT
AVAIL OAMSignalTranslator.1OAMSignalTranslatorCapsulefms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMSIHBServer.2
OAMAlarmMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMSUMgr.1
OAMSUMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMSysCoordServer.1OAMSysCoordServerCapsulefms02 ACT
AVAILABLE: 17 UNAVAILABLE: 0 INITIALIZED: 0 RECOVERING: 0
OFFLINE: 0 WAITFORPROMOTE : 0 INVALID : 0
[RNC 24:fms01]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To check the status of the FMSblade, execute the following command:


RCCcstat

Result:
RCC Cluster [FLXcluster] Status
fms01
2
L - LEAD
fms02
3
A - ACTIVE
[RNC 24:fms01]->
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-23
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Copying configuration data from another IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Copying configuration data from another IPC


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to compare configuration data of one IPC (Day-one data)
with an other IPC (pre-configured data) by using WPS.
The Compare objects feature in WPS allows users to compare the configuration data of
two IPC object instances and copy the required configuration from one IPC to another.
Before you begin

To complete this procedure successfully, ensure that the following prerequisites are met:

The IPC object instances are created with different user labels in WPS.
A db_walk.dump file with the Day1 data is available on your local directory.
A db_walk.dump file, which contains the IPC configuration data you intend to use for
configuring another IPC, is available on your local directory.

For more information on generating the db_walk.dump file, see Generating db_walk
dump file at IPC (p. 5-13).
To modify IPC with the configuration data of another IPC

Follow these steps to compare the configuration data of two IPCs.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Load the db_walk.dump file with Day1 data to WPS. To import the content from the file,
click Load IPC snapshot file at one selected LIPC, for example, IPC/1, LIPC/1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Load the db_walk.dump file with the configuration information into WPS. To import the
content from the file, click Load IPC snapshot file at another selected LIPC, for example,
IPC/2, LIPC/1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the IPC object instances you want to compare, for example, IPC/1, LIPC/1 and
IPC/2, LIPC/1. From the Edit menu, click Compare.
The following screen with the configuration data appears.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-24
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Copying configuration data from another IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-3 Compare data of two IPC objects

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Apply the changes from one IPC object instance to another, for example, IPC/2, LIPC/1
(IPC with the configuration data) into IPC/1, LIPC/1 (IPC with the day-one data).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Run WPS checks on the current workorder and make the required changes to pass the
check.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Generate IPC CLI file and reverse using current workorder for the IPC object
that you want to modify. The IPC CLI script will be generated.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-25
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Copying configuration data from another IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For more information on the IPC CLI script generation procedure, see Generating IPC
CLI batch file from WPS (p. 5-21).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To apply modifications to IPC, import the CLI script file into IPC. For more information
on importing CLI script into IPC, see Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS
(p. 5-21).
Note: If a read-write attribute is updated in WPS, LIPC must be reset to load the
configuration with the updated value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify if the database is updated with configuration changes. Check the connectivity to all
FMS servers by executing the following command:
rnccheckservers
Result:
Configuration Manager active on fms01
STATE SERVER
CAPSULE
NODE TYPE
=======================================================AVAIL
LogMgrInstance.1 OAMLogMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMAlarmMgr.2
OAMAlarmMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMBUMgr.1
OAMBUMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMDataAuditServer.1OAMDataAuditServerCapsulefms ACT
AVAIL OAMEATranslator.1 OAMEATranslatorCapsulefms01 ACT
AVAIL OAMFMSTranslator.1OAMFMSTranslatorCapsulefms01ACT
AVAIL OAMInterfaceRAgent.1OAMInterfaceRCapsulefms02ACT
AVAIL OAMLMTGwServer.1 OAMLMTGwCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMMEOServer.1
OAMMEOServerCapsule
fms01 ACT
AVAIL OAMOAMSchedulerServer.1 OAMOAMSchedulerServerCapsule fms01 ACT
AVAIL OAMOFManager.1
OAMOFManagerCapsule
fms01 ACT
AVAIL OAMPMServer.1
OAMPerfMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMShelfTranslator.1OAMShelfTranslatorCapsulfms0 ACT
AVAIL OAMSignalTranslator.1OAMSignalTranslatorCapsulefms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMSIHBServer.2
OAMAlarmMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMSUMgr.1
OAMSUMgrCapsule
fms02 ACT
AVAIL OAMSysCoordServer.1OAMSysCoordServerCapsulefms02 ACT
AVAILABLE: 17 UNAVAILABLE: 0 INITIALIZED: 0 RECOVERING: 0
OFFLINE: 0 WAITFORPROMOTE : 0 INVALID : 0
[RNC 24:fms01]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To check the status of the FMSblade, execute the following command:


RCCcstat

Result:
RCC Cluster [FLXcluster] Status
fms01
2
L - LEAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-26
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring IPC with WPS

Copying configuration data from another IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

fms02
3
A - ACTIVE
[RNC 24:fms01]->
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-27
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring locationProfile with WPS


Overview
Purpose

This section describes how to create the LocationProfile and link the LocationProfile to a
Small Cell group and location with WPS . The location profile needs to be set for regional
based network topology.
Contents
Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network

5-29

Configuring LocationProfile for a location (region)

5-31

Configuring LocationProfile for a Small Cell group

5-32

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-28
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to create the location profile in a region based small cell
network.
Before you begin

To carry out this procedure successfully, ensure that the Small Cell network is a
region-based network and consists of the locationProfile MO.
To create LocationProfile
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the network tree, select the element Network and click the Edition tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Edition tab, from the Object creation: create drop-down menu, select the MO
LocationProfile[OAM/OAM].
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Create button and fill in the appropriate parameter values. The LocationProfile
MO is created in the network tree for configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the LocationProfile MO created in Step 4.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Edition tab, from the Object creation: create drop-down menu, select the child
object BSRLocationProfile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Create button and fill in the appropriate parameter values . The
BSRLocationProfile child object is created under LocationProfile MO.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Under BSRLocationProfile created in Step 7, select the Lcell MO and set the required
parameter values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Edition tab, from the Object creation: create drop-down menu, select the child
object GsmFrequencyList.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-29
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Click the Create button and fill in the appropriate parameter values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

In the Edition tab, from the Object creation: create drop-down menu, select the child
object MacroUMTSCellFrequencyList.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Click the Create button and fill in the appropriate parameter values.
Result: The LocationProfile is created in the region based Small Cell network.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-30
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Configuring LocationProfile for a location (region)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring LocationProfile for a location (region)


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to configure the location profile for a location in
region-based network topology.
Before you begin

To carry out this procedure successfully, ensure that the Small Cell network is a
region-based network and consists of the managed objects; locationProfile and Location.
To configure LocationProfile for a location
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Network tree; under the managed object Locations/0, select the appropriate
location (for example: Location/0).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Edition tab, select the parameter locationProfile and click Browse.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate LocationProfile (for example: LocationProfile/0) from list of


location profiles displayed, and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Set to set the locationProfile for the selected location.


Result: The LocationProfile is configured for the selected location (region).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-31
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Configuring LocationProfile for a Small Cell group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring LocationProfile for a Small Cell group


Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to configure the location profile for a Small Cell group in
region-based network topology.
Before you begin

To carry out this procedure successfully, ensure that the Small Cell network is a
region-based network and consists of the managed objects; locationProfile, Location, and
FemoGroup.
To configure LocationProfile for a Small Cell group
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Network tree; under the managed object FemtoCluster (for example:
FemtoCluster/0), select the appropriate Small Cell group (for example: FemtoGroup/1).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Edition tab, select the parameter locationProfile and click Browse.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate LocationProfile (for example: LocationProfile/0) from list of


location profiles displayed, and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Set to set the locationProfile for the selected Small Cell group.
Result: The LocationProfile is configured for the selected Small Cell group.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-32
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Reparenting Small Cells

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reparenting Small Cells


Overview
Purpose

This section describes how to reparent a small cell and perform a bulk operation in WPS
to reparent small cells to a Small Cell Cluster or group.
Contents
Reparenting a Small Cell

5-34

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk

5-37

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-33
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting a Small Cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reparenting a Small Cell


Purpose

Use this procedure to reparent small cells to a Small Cell cluster.


Before you begin

To perform reparenting operations on a small cell successfully, ensure that the following
prerequisites are met:

The FemtoCluster instance and the Femto objects are created with appropriate values
and user labels in WPS.
All the required configuration files such as bulk CM are loaded into WPS.

To reparent a small cell

Follow these steps to reparent a small cell:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS workspace, click the small cell object you want to reparent.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Overview tab and then click Re-parent Femto.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-34
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting a Small Cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The following screen appears.


Figure 5-4 Small Cell reparenting

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the target small cell cluster or group to which you want to re-parent the small cell.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Add appropriate values for the Target Femto Id, Target Femto Latitude, Target Femto
longitude, Target Femto locationAreaCode, Target Femto routingAreaCode, Target
Femto serviceAreaCode, notAllowedBsrIds, and Target bsr Id attributes.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-35
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting a Small Cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ensure that the attributes assigned to FemtoCluster objects are unique. For example, each
small cell must have a unique ID. When a Femtocluster is created or modified with a
manual BSRID, the WPS checks to see if the manual BSRID value provided is not listed
in the notAllowedBsrIds. If it is listed, then WPS displays an error message indicating
that the manual value provided is blocked from being assigned to any femto.
Note: All attributes except Target bsr Id are mandatory. If there is no value assigned
to the Target bsr Id attribute, the bsrId for the small cell will not be set. Therefore,
ensure that you set this attribute with an appropriate value or the default value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
Result: The small cell will be reparented to the specified target Small Cell group or
cluster, and the configuration data will be updated with the new values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Run the WPS checks and make the required changes to pass the check.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-36
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk


Purpose

Use this procedure to reparent more than one small cell at a time.
Before you begin

To perform bulk reparenting operations on a small cell cluster, ensure that the following
prerequisites are met:

The FemtoCluster instance and the Femto objects are created with appropriate values
and user labels in WPS.
All the required configuration files such as bulk CM are loaded into WPS.

To reparent small cells in bulk

Follow these steps to carry out the bulk reparenting operation:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the WPS workspace, click the small cell object you want to reparent.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Overview tab and then click Bulk Femto Reparenting.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-37
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The following screen appears.


Figure 5-5 Bulk reparenting

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To generate a template for bulk reparenting, click Generate.


Result: The template will be created in the .xls format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Add appropriate values for the Target Femto Id, Target Femto Latitude, Target Femto
longitude, Target Femto locationAreaCode, Target Femto routingAreaCode, Target
Femto serviceAreaCode, and Target bsr Id attributes.
Ensure that the attributes assigned to FemtoCluster objects are unique. For example, each
femto must have a unique ID.
Note: All attributes, except Target bsr Id, are mandatory. If there is no value assigned
to the Target bsr Id attribute, the bsrId for the small cell will not be set. Therefore,
ensure that you set this attribute with an appropriate value or the default value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Save the template to your local directory.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-38
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To import the bulk reparenting Excel file with the updated FemtoCluster attributes, click
Bulk Femto Reparenting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the bulk reparenting Excel file from your local directory.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
Result: The FemtoCluster configuration data will be updated with the new values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Run the WPS checks and make the required changes to pass the check.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
5-39
9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 March 2014

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures


Configuring Call Trace on NEs

Glossary of terms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring Call Trace on NEs


Overview
Purpose

This section describes how to activate Call Trace sessions on small cell network elements
such as FGW, IPC, and Small Cells.
Contents
Activating Call Trace sessions on FGW

5-41

Activating Call Trace sessions on IPC

5-43

Activating Call Trace sessions on a small cell

5-45

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS
5-40
Use pursuant to applicabl